JP2016220835A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine characterized in control means.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises control means and detection means. The detection means can detect magnetism and output a signal (hereafter referred to as "a magnetism detection signal"). The control means outputs a first signal when a second condition is satisfied, and executes control related to a signal to be output to the outside (hereafter referred to as "a second signal") when determining that the magnetism has been detected.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 40

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball ball game machine (pachinko machine), a revolving game machine (slot machine), a sealed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  The conventional game machine is provided with a control means (for example, patent document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game machine has room for improvement with respect to the control means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in the control means.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a control unit and a detection unit, wherein the detection unit is a unit capable of detecting magnetism, and the detection unit includes a signal ( Hereinafter referred to as “magnetic detection signal”), and the control means is a means for outputting the first signal when the second condition is satisfied, and the control means The game machine is a means for executing control related to a signal output to the outside (hereinafter referred to as “second signal”) when it is determined that the magnetism is detected. .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the control means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is shown. (B) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 is shown. (C) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (D) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a special figure prefetch process. The prefetch result information etc. are illustrated in the state where the prefetch result memory | storage part was memorize | stored. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a schematic diagram explaining the wide range magnetic sensor of this embodiment (1st Embodiment). It is a schematic diagram explaining the wide range magnetic sensor of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wide range magnetic sensor of this embodiment, (a) is an external perspective view of a wide range magnetic sensor, (b) is a side view which shows the positional relationship of a wide range magnetic sensor. It is a conceptual diagram of the detection (detection) space of the wide range magnetic sensor of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the circuit structure of the wide range magnetic sensor of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the flow of the signal output regarding the wide range magnetic sensor of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the flow of the signal output regarding the wide range magnetic sensor of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the flow of the signal output regarding the wide range magnetic sensor of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the connection between each board | substrate. It is an example of the timing chart of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the start timing and end timing of a big hit game. It is a front view which shows the attacker unit of this embodiment. It is a front view which shows the attacker unit of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the error which the pachinko machine of this embodiment alert | reports. It is a figure which shows an example of the error which the pachinko machine of this embodiment alert | reports. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus in one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus in one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus in one game in time series. It is a display example in the case of performing a magnetic detection error notification. It is a display example in the case of performing a magnetic detection error notification. It is a display example in the case of performing a magnetic detection error notification. It is a figure which shows the outline of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment (2nd Embodiment). It is a figure which shows the outline of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment (2nd Embodiment). It is a figure which shows the outline of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment (2nd Embodiment). (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of main control part power-on. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a return starting process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an initial stage starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main loop process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an external output signal management process. It is the figure which showed the signal number, signal name, and output condition of an external terminal board signal. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the signal flow of the 2nd relay board | substrate 704, (b) It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the signal flow of the 1st relay board | substrate 702. It is an example of the timing chart of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the error alerting | reporting of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the error alerting | reporting of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the output example of the security information signal of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

  <First Embodiment>

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  <Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is attached to the front side of the main body 104 via a hinge portion 112 so that the inside Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that guides the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation The ball launching handle 134 that launches the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  <Back>

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to a payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 4) described later. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch controller 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power source controller 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game shop clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  Although details will be described later, an ornamental symbol display device 208 and an effect device 206 having an effect movable body 224 that imitates a human arm are arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the lower right of the game area 124, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol hold lamp 218 are displayed. In addition, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL ( Other display devices including an electroluminescence display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 includes a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. The positions and sizes of the display areas 208a to 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general figure variable game is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  Further, in a lower area of the game area 124, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a first variable winning opening 234, A second variable winning opening 235 is provided, and a normal start opening 228 is provided in the right area of the game area 124.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, one is arranged below the center part of the game board 200 and one at the lower right. The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 have the same structure, and include door members 234a and 235a that can be freely opened and closed, and balls cannot be entered while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the special figure display device wins the special figure display game and the special symbol display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door members 234a and 235a have a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds). Opening and closing at the number of times (for example, 15 times)

  In this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable game is won, the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and when the special figure 2 variable game is won. Opens and closes the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls). It is discharged as a sphere into the upper plate 126. The balls that have entered the first variable prize opening 234 and the second variable prize opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the spear 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. 2 variable prize winning opening 235) or starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or ordinary opening The outlet 240 is reached only by passing through 228.

  <Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in an arc in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, each starting port, winning port, variable winning port A (first variable winning port 234 and / or second variable winning port 235). Receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor for detecting a passing game ball, a magnetic sensor (wide range magnetic sensor), a front frame door opening sensor 109, an inner frame opening sensor, a lower pan full sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; a predetermined symbol display device; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and the like. A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the status display unit 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) and a predetermined movable member For example, a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the attacker A, and the like is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. In addition, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a two-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. Also, a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 can play the pachinko machine 100 game in the information input circuit 350 provided in an external device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) or a data display) via the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349. An external terminal board signal (details will be described later) indicating information and the like is output. The “external terminal board” denoted by reference numeral 349 may be referred to as an “external concentrated terminal board” in the slot machine, and is not limited to the name “external terminal board”.

  The payout controller 600 also outputs an external terminal board signal to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and detection of the shielding device sensor 430 and the chance button The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the unit 724 to the basic circuit 402, the ROM 406 for storing the control program and various effect data, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read out. Use the VRAM 436 work area to generate a display image. And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display device 208 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and frequency. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the chance button drive unit 708, and the current position of the effect movable body 224. A movable body sensor 424 to be detected, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table A game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the frame lamp 542, and serial communication control for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 The circuit 520 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Also, the payout control unit 600 receives the detection result of the front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the firing intensity according to the amount, control of a launch motor (not shown) that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and a ball feeding device that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 Control (not shown) is performed.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  <Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and common maps to be explained FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 4B shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 5 (a), five types from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are shown as the stop pattern modes of Special Figure 1 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 5 (b), There are four types of special symbols “stop” from “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” as special symbols 2 of special symbol 2 in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In addition, the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  Among the stop symbol patterns of Special Figure 1, “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  The stop symbol mode of the other special figure 1 will be described. "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. The “special drawing E” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  Further, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 will be described. “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol. , “Special Figure d” is an outlier symbol.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” and the 8R jackpot of “Special Figure c” are notified, a combination of symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “Decoration 1—Decoration”). 1-decoration 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", the 16R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", and the 8R special jackpot of "Special Figure b", a combination of symbols in which three odd odd decorative symbols are arranged (For example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

  Further, when notifying the small hit of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and 2R jackpot called “special drawing C” suddenly changes is notified. Then, “decoration 1—decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the special symbol E or the special symbol d, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5C is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of the normal figure, “normal figure A” which is a winning symbol and “normal figure B” which is an outlier symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (d), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which turns off, and the black painting part shows the location of the segment which lights up.

  <Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random number values is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  <Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232 It is determined that there has been a ball entry or a normal start port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. To do. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made at the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, a ball enters the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. Stores information indicating that this has occurred.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted. In step S224, special figure prefetching processing is performed. The special figure prefetch process will be described later.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).
In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure a shown in FIG. ~ Special figure d (In the special figure 1 state update process, the special figure A to the special figure E shown in FIG. 5A is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is detected until a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, the maximum count number) is detected in the second variable prize opening 235 (see FIG. 1 is the first variable prize opening 234). A signal for holding the door member 235a (the door member 234a in FIG. 1) in an open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the door member 234a of the first variable prize winning opening 234. The information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 235a (see FIG. 1 is the door member 234a) and the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 235a (see FIG. 1 is the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234) of the second variable winning opening 235. A signal for holding the closed state is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times, the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). In order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player of the image is displayed, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, the number of hours (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the RAM 308 is provided at the same time as the end of the jackpot game. Turn on the short time flag. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high-probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low-probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during the jackpot game, the second number of game balls before the predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 during the jackpot game. To solve this, there is a problem that many game balls enter the special figure starting port 232 and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. It is.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234 (or Including the presence or absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326, and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.

  <Special figure look-ahead processing>

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main control unit main process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 9, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of results as the special figure 1 prefetch number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are shown in FIG. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the prefetch number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the special chart prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S <b> 301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S252. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is displayed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the starting information of the special figure 1 has not increased, the special figure prefetch process is terminated. Return to.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control part main process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information and indicating that the start information is not pre-read. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit main interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In addition, pre-reading is always executed for the starting information of the increased special figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the starting information in FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result. Further, the start information and the prefetch result of each special figure may be stored in one start information and the prefetch result storage unit without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special figure. good.

  <Prefetch result information>

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 6A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6A, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing E” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special drawing E” as stop symbol information. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure D ”(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure A ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 5B, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is expressed as “none”.

  FIG. 6C shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 5C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  Next, a payout control unit main process executed by the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process of the payout control unit.

  The payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, an I / O port, and a voltage monitoring circuit. Similarly to the voltage monitoring circuit provided in the main control unit 300, the voltage monitoring circuit provided in the payout control unit 600 has a predetermined voltage value (in this embodiment, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power management unit 650 to the payout control unit 600). If it is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the CPU of the payout control unit 600. Even if a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 of the main control unit 300, the low voltage signal may not be output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the payout control unit 600.

A command including power-on information is transmitted from the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. Based on the receipt of this command, the payout control unit 600 C
The PU starts the payout control unit main process.

  First, in step S501, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU of the payout control unit 600.

  In step S502, it is determined whether or not a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the dispensing control unit 600, that is, whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed. If the low-voltage signal is off (when power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S503. move on.

  In step S503, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, to the counter / timer, a setting for allowing the payout control unit 600 to write to the RAM, I Performs initial setting of / O port.

  In step S504, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption). If the state before power interruption does not return (when the pachinko machine 100 is in the initial state), step S506 is performed. If the process returns to the state before the power interruption, the process proceeds to step S505. Specifically, also in this step S504, processing similar to that in step S111 of the main control unit 300 main processing is performed, and if RAM clear is necessary, the process proceeds to step S506 in order to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not necessary, the power status information is read from the RAM of the payout control unit 600, and when the power status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state in step S506. If it is information indicating suspend, the checksum is executed on the RAM of the payout control unit 600. If the checksum result is normal, the process proceeds to step S505 to return to the state before power interruption. If the result of the checksum is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S506 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S505, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, of the storage area of the payout controller 600 RAM, a storage area to be cleared upon power recovery (a command buffer for storing commands, a memory other than an error status for storing error status, etc.) Area) is initialized.

  In step S506, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer, predetermined areas (for example, all storage areas) of the RAM of the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S507, initial setting 3 is performed. In the initial setting 3, information other than the illegal payout error and the payout excess error among the error statuses stored in the error status storage area provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 600 is cleared, interrupt permission is set, and the like.

  In step S508, it is determined whether there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main control unit 300. If there is unanalyzed data, command analysis processing is performed in step S509, and there is no unanalyzed data. Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

  In step S510, similarly to step S502, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is off. If the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply shutoff is not detected), the process returns to step S508. If the signal is on (when power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S511.

  In step S511, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 600, and information indicating suspend is set in the power status storage area. Also, all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM of the payout control unit 600 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and a numerical storage area for checksum calculation The value obtained by subtracting the result of addition from the value stored in is calculated as a checksum (checksum at power interruption), and the calculated checksum at power interruption is stored in the above-described numerical storage area for checksum calculation, A setting for prohibiting writing to the RAM of the payout control unit 600 is performed.

  <Discharge control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a payout control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  The payout control unit 600 also includes a counter circuit that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms), and starts the payout control unit timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. To do.

  In step S601, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU of the payout control unit 600 to the stack area is performed.

  The payout control unit 600 is also provided with a watch dog timer (WDT). In step S602, the WDT is restarted.

  In step S603, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the value of the I / O port of the payout control unit 600 is acquired to detect the state of the payout sensor 604 and the like shown in FIG.

  In step S604, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, various timers are updated, including timers for timing the turn-on / off time of the payout notification LED, the drive / non-drive time of the payout motor 602 shown in FIG.

In step S605, an error monitoring process is performed. Various error signals such as a lower pan full error signal and a glass frame opening error signal are sent from the main control unit 300 to the I / O port of the payout control unit 600. The RAM of the payout control unit 600 is provided with an error status storage area, a game medium lending information storage area, a payout completion number check storage area, and a motor drive amount storage area. Information corresponding to each error signal is stored in the error status storage area. In this error monitoring process, it is determined whether or not various error signals are ON. If ON, information indicating an error corresponding to the error status storage area is stored. If OFF, the error status storage area is stored. The information indicating the cancellation of the error corresponding to is stored. Further, whether or not communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is possible is determined based on whether or not a command from the main control unit can be received continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), and an error status is stored. If the communication is possible, information indicating that communication is possible is stored in the area, and if the communication is impossible, information indicating that communication is not possible (main control communication error) is stored. In addition, as to whether or not communication between the card unit (CR unit) 608 and the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 is possible, is it impossible to continuously receive a signal from the card unit 608 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms)? If the communication is possible in the error status storage area, information indicating that communication is possible is conversely impossible if communication is impossible (CR unit unconnected error) Is stored. In addition, an error release signal is also sent to the I / O port of the payout control unit 600. In this error monitoring process, it is also determined whether or not the error cancellation signal is on. If the error cancellation signal is on, the information stored in the error status storage area is initialized to cancel the error.

  In step S606, CR unit communication processing is performed. In this CR unit communication process, a game medium lending signal is received from the interface unit 606 shown in FIG. 4 to determine whether or not the game medium lending signal sensor signal is on. When the game medium lending signal is on (interface) When a ball lending request is input from the unit 606), information indicating that there is a game medium lending request is stored in the game medium lending information storage area provided in the RAM.

  In step S607, a payout operation management process is performed. In the error status storage area described above, information on illegal payout errors and information on payout excess errors are also stored. In this payout operation management process, the information on the illegal payout error and the payout excess error information are read from the error status storage area, and if neither error has occurred, the signal from the payout sensor 604 shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the number of payouts is monitored based on the payout sensor signal. That is, when a predetermined error has occurred, the driving of the payout motor 602 is stopped, that is, the payout of a prize medium (for example, a game ball) from the payout device is stopped. Specifically, the signal of the payout sensor 604 is detected to determine whether or not the payout sensor signal is on. When the payout sensor signal is on (when the ball passes through the payout sensor), the number of payouts completed. 1 is added to the check and stored in the payout completion number check storage area. Further, when the payout sensor signal is turned on when there is no request for a winning ball or a lending ball, information indicating an illegal payout error is stored in the error status storage area, and the number of winning balls or the number of lending balls is When each request number is exceeded and the number exceeds the predetermined number, information indicating a payout excess error is stored in the error status storage area.

  In addition, the information indicating the bottom full tank error, the information on the illegal payout error, and the information on the payout excess error are read from the error status storage area described above, and when any error has not occurred, the payout start monitoring process, the initial Any one of position search operation processing, normal payout operation processing, retry operation processing, and reverse rotation operation processing is performed.

  As described above, the payout device 152 includes a sprocket that is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor 602. This sprocket temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and also drives the payout motor 602 to rotate by a predetermined angle, thereby temporarily retaining the game ball. Are delivered one by one downward to the dispensing device 152. In the payout start monitoring process, when the number of lending requests and the number of requested prize balls are 0, and the number of requested next prize balls is other than 0, the number of requested next prize balls is set as the number of requested prize balls, and the next prize ball request Clear the number. When the position of the payout motor 602 is indefinite (when the operation mode is the initial position search operation mode), 1 is subtracted from the payout completion number check and stored in the payout completion number check storage area. When the position is fixed (when the operation mode is the normal payout operation mode), 0 is set in the payout completion number check storage area as a payout completion number check. Also, the requested number of winning balls is converted into an amount for driving the payout motor 602 (motor drive amount), and this is stored in the motor drive amount storage area provided in the RAM, and the motor control data table provided in the RAM is referred to. Then, motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected, and motor drive control data indicating normal rotation is output to the motor control circuit that controls the payout motor 602 via the I / O port. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the motor of the payout motor 602 a predetermined number of times to rotate the sprocket in the forward direction.

In the initial position search operation process and the normal payout operation process, after the driving of the payout motor 602 is completed, the payout completion check is read from the payout completion number check storage area, and the payout completion check is 0.
If the payout completion check is other than 0, information indicating the payout device error is set in the error status storage area and the retry operation process is prepared. I do.

  In the retry operation process, wait for a predetermined time to elapse (wait for the retry operation start wait timer to become 0), and when the retry operation start wait timer becomes 0, execute the reverse rotation operation process. Make preparations. In the reverse rotation operation process, motor drive control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected with reference to the motor control data table described above, and motor drive control data indicating reverse rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. To do. Thus, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the payout motor 602 a predetermined number of times to drive the sprocket in the reverse rotation. Further, in the reverse rotation operation process, preparation for executing the payout start monitoring process is performed after the driving of the payout motor 602 is completed.

  In step S608, a payout motor drive monitoring process is performed. In the payout motor drive monitoring process, any one of a drive start monitoring process, an acceleration drive process, a constant speed drive process, a brake drive process, and a drive end process is performed.

  In the drive start monitoring process, the information on the lower pan full tank error, the information on the illegal payout error, and the information on the payout excess error are read from the error status storage area described above. Motor control data corresponding to the motor drive amount is selected with reference to the control data table, and motor drive control data indicating normal rotation is output to the motor control circuit via the I / O port. As a result, the motor control circuit changes the excitation position of the dispensing motor 602 a predetermined number of times to rotate the sprocket in the forward direction.

  In the acceleration drive process and constant speed drive process, 1 is subtracted from the payout completion number check every time the excitation position of the payout motor 602 is changed 16 times, except during the initial position search operation of the sprocket or the reverse rotation operation. And stored in the payout completion number check storage area. When the updated payout completion number check is less than −4, preparation for executing the brake drive process is made. Further, the game medium lending information is read from the above-mentioned game medium lending information storage area, the presence / absence of information indicating that there is a request for lending a game medium is determined, and information indicating that there is a request for lending a game medium is present. In some cases (when a ball lending request is input from the interface unit 606 while paying out a prize ball), preparations for executing the brake driving process are made.

  In the brake drive process, it waits for a predetermined time to elapse (waits for the motor drive management timer to become 0), and when the motor drive management timer becomes 0, prepares to execute the drive end process In the drive end process, a post-process for driving the motor is performed.

  In step S609, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM of the payout control unit 600 (for example, a prize ball signal output every time a payout sensor signal is input) is sent via an information output circuit (not shown). The information is output to an information input circuit 350 that is separate from the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S610, port output processing is performed. In this port output process, a launch permission signal for permitting launch is output from the I / O port of the payout controller 600 to the launch controller 630 shown in FIG. However, when the above-mentioned main control communication error or CR unit non-connection error has occurred, a state is set in which the firing permission signal is not output. Therefore, when the main control unit 300 is cut off and power is supplied to the payout control unit 600, a main control communication error is recognized in the above-described step S605, and a launch permission signal is output in this port output processing. It is set to the state that does not.

  In step S611, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S601 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and the payout control unit timer interrupt process ends.

  <Wide range magnetic sensor>

  12 and 13 are diagrams showing an outline of an example of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 12, the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment includes a wide range magnetic sensor 700. The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is embedded in the vicinity of a winning opening (here, as an example, the second variable winning opening 235 and the general winning opening 226) of the game board 200 in order to detect fraud using a magnet (magnetic force). When abnormal magnetism is detected during the game, the detection signal is output to a hall computer or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 of this embodiment performs initial setting (initialization) when the power is turned on, but does not execute the initial setting when the front frame door 106 is open. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player who is playing a game from being disadvantaged. On the other hand, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 executes the initial setting even when the movable means (such as the attacker A or the rendering conductor 224) is in operation. Thereby, the erroneous detection of the magnetism generated by the opening operation of the attacker A can be prevented.

  FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the wide range magnetic sensor 700. 14A is an external perspective view of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700, and FIG. 14B is a transparent plate member made of glass or resin provided at the openings of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 and the front frame door 106. FIG. It is a side view which shows the positional relationship of 118. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, in the wide range magnetic sensor 700, one surface (for example, the back surface of the sensor connector) of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped package is the detection surface 700a. As shown in FIG. 14B, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is arranged on the game board 200 so that the detection surface 700a and the transparent plate member 118 of the front frame door 106 in the closed state are parallel to each other. (Embedded inside the game board 200). The distance from the detection surface 700a to the surface of the transparent plate member 118 with the front frame door 106 closed is a fixed distance (for example, 50 mm to 70 mm).

  FIG. 15 is a conceptual diagram of a detection (detection) space of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700. FIG. 15A is an image diagram displayed three-dimensionally, and FIG. 15B is an image diagram displayed two-dimensionally viewed from the Y direction.

  The magnetic detection range of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is an area shown in black. That is, the YZ plane is a substantially circular area centered on the wide range magnetic sensor 700, and the XZ plane is an area extending in a bowl shape from side to side from the center of the wide range magnetic sensor 700. Since the wide range magnetic sensor 700 has a sensitivity difference between the detection sensitivity in the X direction and the detection sensitivity in the Y direction and the Z direction, a difference occurs in the detection region.

  FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram showing a circuit configuration of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram showing an example of connection between the main controller 300 and the wide range magnetic sensor 700, FIG. 4B is a table showing the function of each terminal, and FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of connection between a control unit (for example, a first sub control unit 400) and a wide range magnetic sensor 700. FIG.

  The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 includes, for example, a magnetic sensor main circuit, a voltage conversion circuit, a transistor, a diode, a resistor, and the like. As shown in FIGS. A first terminal (1pin), a second terminal (2pin) serving as a first input terminal IN1, a third terminal (3pin) serving as a second input terminal IN2, a fourth terminal (4pin) serving as an output terminal OUT, and a ground terminal It has five terminals of a fifth terminal (5 pin) that becomes GND.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the first terminal is connected to the power supply device, and the second terminal (first input terminal IN1) is the input power supply terminal, which initializes and restarts the wide range magnetic sensor 700. . The second terminal is connected to the main control unit 300, and a detection operation stop signal output from the main control unit 300 when the front frame door 106 is opened is input. When the detection operation stop signal is input to the wide range magnetic sensor 700, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 cannot be detected. Further, when the opened front frame door 106 is closed, the input of the detection operation stop signal from the main control unit 300 ends. In this example, the second terminal is connected to the main control unit 300. However, the second terminal is not limited to the main control unit 300, and an output unit (for example, a door opening sensor) that outputs a detection operation stop signal. It only has to be connected to. Note that the second terminal may be connected to the front frame door opening sensor 109.

  The third terminal (second input terminal IN2) is an input power supply terminal that switches the detection mode of the wide range magnetic sensor 700. In the present embodiment, since the mode is fixed, an H or L signal may be input. Specifically, it is connected to the power supply device (H) and fixed to one mode. In addition, when fixing to the other mode, it connects to GND (L). Alternatively, the same signal may be continuously input by connecting to the main control unit 300. The fourth terminal is connected to the main control unit 300 and outputs a magnetic detection signal from the wide range magnetic sensor 700. A pull-up resistor R is connected between the main controller 300 and the output terminal OUT. The fifth terminal is grounded.

  FIG. 3C shows a case where the wide range magnetic sensor 700 and the first sub control unit 400 are connected.

  The first terminal is connected to the power supply device, the second terminal is connected to the main control unit 300, and the detection operation stop signal output from the main control unit 300 when the front frame door 106 is opened is input. When the detection operation stop signal is input to the wide range magnetic sensor 700, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 cannot be detected. Further, when the opened front frame door 106 is closed, the input of the detection operation stop signal from the main control unit 300 ends. In this example, the second terminal is connected to the main control unit 300. However, the second terminal is not limited to the main control unit 300, and may be connected to a control unit that outputs a detection operation stop signal. The second terminal may be connected to the front frame door opening sensor 109.

  The third terminal is a detection mode switching terminal. In this example, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 includes a plurality of detection modes having different detection ranges (a first detection mode (MODE 1) in which the detection range is the first range) and a second detection mode in which the detection range is the second range. Detection mode (MODE2)), and the detection mode can be switched by switching the connection destination of the third terminal. For example, the detection range of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 may be changed by the operation of a store clerk. Thereby, the detection range output as a magnet error to the control unit (here, the first sub-control unit 400) can be changed, and the case where the magnet error is output and the case where the magnet error is not output can be selected. As described above, a plurality of detection modes may be provided and can be changed according to the application, but only one detection mode may be mounted.

  The fourth terminal is connected to a sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500), and outputs a magnetic detection signal from the wide range magnetic sensor 700. A pull-up resistor R is connected between the sub control unit and the output terminal OUT. The fifth terminal is grounded.

  In addition, when connecting to the main control unit 300 in FIG. 5A, the detection mode cannot be selected (only one predetermined detection mode is set (selected)), One of the detection modes may be switched by a switch or the like (provided with a plurality of detection modes). Further, even when connecting to the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 10C, only one predetermined detection mode may be set (selected).

  The data acquisition interval of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is constant (for example, 10 ms, 5 ms, etc.), but may not be constant. Further, the data acquisition interval of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 may be different depending on the game state (during big hit, probability change, time reduction, normal state, waiting for customer screen display, symbol change, symbol stop, etc.).

  Further, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 of this embodiment may exclude magnetic changes due to the opening / closing operation of the attacker A. For example, the leakage of the solenoid 332 that opens / closes the door members 234a, 235a, etc. of the attacker A It may have a function of canceling the magnetic field. As a cancel function of the leakage magnetic field of the solenoid 332, when there is a magnetic field change of a certain value or more during data sampling, a certain number of times (starting from the time when the magnetic field change of a certain value or more is first detected (detected) ( For example, 10 times) data is acquired, and one or a plurality (for example, 3) of data having the highest inclination is selected from the data, and if the inclination exceeds the inclination set in the wide range magnetic sensor in advance, the solenoid 332 It may be determined that the magnetic field is generated (leakage magnetic field), and the magnetic detection signal may not be output.

  <Signal Output Flow for Wide-Range Magnetic Sensor (Example 1)>

  FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a flow of signal output related to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700. FIG. 17A is a block diagram when the initialization of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is executed. The flow of signals input to the first input terminal IN1 is shown. FIG. 7B is a block diagram when magnetic detection is performed by the wide range magnetic sensor 700, and shows the flow of signals output from the output terminal OUT. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 16, in the circuit configuration of FIG. 16A, the second terminal (first input terminal IN1) is connected to the front frame door opening sensor 109, and the fourth terminal (output terminal OUT) is mainly connected. The control unit 300 is connected.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, for example, the front frame door open sensor 109 is a door state signal (door open) indicating the state (open and closed) of the front frame door 106 at a predetermined timing (at a predetermined cycle). Signal or door closing signal) is output to the wide range magnetic sensor 700. The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 executes a magnetic detection operation stop or initialization according to the input door state signal. That is, when the front frame door 106 is opened (when a door opening signal is input), magnetic detection is prohibited, and when the front frame door 106 is closed (when a door closing signal is input or the door is opened). If the signal is not input, the initialization of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is started. That is, the door closing signal in this case is an initialization signal of the wide range magnetic sensor 700, and the door opening signal (information signal that the door closing signal is not input) is a magnetic detection operation stop signal. When the initialization signal is input, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stores the threshold value (first value) in the storage means (for example, RAM) inside the sensor.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 detects (detects) magnetism at a predetermined timing (with a predetermined period), and sets the detected magnetic value (second value) to an initial value. When the detected magnetic value exceeds the threshold value, the magnetic detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 does not output a magnetic detection signal to the main controller 300 when the detected magnetic value does not exceed the threshold value.

  When the main control unit 300 receives a magnetism detection signal from the wide range magnetic sensor 700, the first sub-control unit 400 (and / or the second sub-control unit 500) reports a magnetic (magnet) error. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 notifies a magnetic (magnet) error by lamp 418 emission, sound output from the speaker 120, display by the decorative symbol display device 208, and the like. The magnetic (magnet) error will be described later.

  <Signal Output Flow for Wide-Range Magnetic Sensor (Example 2)>

  FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing another example of the signal output flow related to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700. FIG. 18A is a block diagram when the initialization of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is executed. The flow of signals input to the first input terminal IN1 of the magnetic sensor 700 is shown. FIG. 5B is a block diagram when magnetic detection is performed by the wide range magnetic sensor 700, and shows a flow of a signal output from the output terminal OUT.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, for example, the front frame door open sensor 109 is a door state signal (door open) indicating the state (open and closed) of the front frame door 106 at a predetermined timing (at a predetermined cycle). Signal or door closing signal) is output to the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 outputs a door state signal to the wide range magnetic sensor 700. The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 executes a magnetic detection operation stop or initialization according to the input door state signal. That is, when the front frame door 106 is opened (when the door open signal is input), magnetic detection is prohibited, and when the front frame door 106 is closed (the door close signal is input (the door open signal is not input). ), The initialization of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is started. When the initialization signal is input, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stores the threshold value (first value) in storage means (for example, RAM) inside the sensor.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 detects (detects) magnetism at a predetermined timing (with a predetermined period), and sets the detected magnetic value (second value) to an initial value. The sub-control unit (first sub-control unit 400 (and / or second sub-control) is detected when the detected magnetic value exceeds the threshold value in comparison with the threshold value stored in the storage means in the conversion process. The magnetic detection signal is output to the unit 500)). The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 does not output a magnetic detection signal to the sub-control unit when the detected magnetic value does not exceed the threshold value. The sub-control unit can switch execution / non-execution of the magnetic (magnet) error notification according to the magnetic detection signal.

  As described above, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 of the present embodiment receives the initialization signal from the output means when the first condition including that the front frame door 106 is closed (first requirement) is satisfied. The magnetic detection signal can be output to the control unit by inputting the initialization signal.

  Here, the output means may be detection means (for example, the front frame door opening sensor 109) that outputs an initialization signal as shown in FIG. 17A, or as shown in FIG. 18A. It may be a control means. In addition, the requirement that the first condition is satisfied may be only the first requirement, or may be a plurality of requirements including the first requirement. This is the same in all the embodiments (examples) according to the present invention.

  Further, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 of this embodiment is one in which an initialization signal is input from the output means when the first condition including that the front frame door 106 is closed is established. The first value (threshold value) is stored in the storage means inside the sensor. The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 detects magnetism at a predetermined timing and compares the detected magnetism value (second value) with the threshold value stored in the storage means in the initialization process. When the magnetic value exceeds the threshold value (when the second condition is satisfied), a magnetic detection signal is output to the control unit.

  When the front frame door 106 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the magnetic flux density detected by the wide range magnetic sensor 700 may become unstable, and a correct magnetic field may not be detected. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the front frame door 106 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is not performed, and the front frame door 106 is closed and the initialization operation is performed in a stable magnetic field. (Threshold value storage (setting)) is executed. By doing so, erroneous detection of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 can be prevented and stable control can be performed.

  Here, the threshold value (first value) may be a value of magnetic flux density (T or mT). Further, the magnitude of magnetic flux density (a [mT]) due to the operation of the solenoid 332 provided in a device (for example, attacker A) controlled by the main control unit 300, and the sub control unit (the first sub control unit 400 and The magnitude of magnetic flux density (b [mT]) by the operation of the solenoid provided in the device (for example, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, etc.) controlled by the second sub-control unit 500) and all the solenoids are turned off. (C [mT]) and the magnetic flux density magnitude (d [mT]) serving as the threshold (first value) (relationship between the magnetic flux density magnitudes) ) Is a> b, but may be reversed. The relationship between the magnetic flux densities is a> c, but may be reversed. The relationship between the magnetic flux densities is b> c, but may be reversed. The relationship between the magnitudes of the magnetic flux densities may be a> d (the solenoid canceling function does not detect the magnetism), or a <d (the threshold value is not exceeded, so the detection is not performed). Not) The relationship between the magnitudes of the magnetic flux densities may be b <d (not detected because the threshold value is not exceeded), or may be b> d (magnetic detection by the solenoid cancel function). do not do). Moreover, c <d may be sufficient as the relationship of the magnitude | size of each magnetic flux density.

  <Timing chart for a wide range magnetic sensor>

  <Example 1 of timing chart>

  FIG. 19 is an example of a timing chart from when the power is turned on to when the wide range magnetic sensor 700 becomes in a state where magnetic detection (reading) is possible in the second embodiment of signal output related to the wide range magnetic sensor shown in FIG. In the figure, the voltage level (ON / OFF) of the power supply from above, the state of the signal PW_WATCH (ON / OFF) input from the power supply board to the main control unit 300, the state of the front frame door open sensor 109 (door sensor) (open) OPEN indicating the state / CLOSE indicating the closed state), the state of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 (magnetic sensor), the state of the solenoid 332 (for example, the solenoid 332 that drives the door members 342a and 235a of the attacker A), and the production means (for example, , A timing chart of the state of the rendering device 206 including the rendering movable body 224, the speaker 120, various lamps 418, and the like. Moreover, (IN) attached to each label of PW_WATCH, door sensor, and magnetic sensor means that these signals are signals input to the main control unit 300, and (OUT) attached to the label of the solenoid is This means that this signal is a signal output from the main control unit 300.

  First, the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off at timing 0, and when the power is turned on at timing t1, the voltage starts to gradually increase. In the period from timing 0 to t1, PW_WATCH is off (L level), and the wide range magnetic sensor 700, solenoid 332, and rendering means are also stopped. The open / closed state of the front frame door 106 may be open or closed until the period of timing t6.

  When the voltage supply (voltage rise) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 50%) at timing t2, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is in a power-on state and executes an initialization process. Specifically, the power supply terminal VDD of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 becomes H level, and the initialization process is executed.

  When the voltage supply (voltage rise) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 70%) at timing t3, the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-on state. As a result, PW_WATCH is turned on (H level), and the solenoid 332 and the rendering means are operable. Here, the operable state means a state that may be the operating state or the stopped state. In this example, the solenoid 332 and the rendering means are the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 and the front surface after the timing t3. Regardless of the state of the frame door 106 and the like, the operation or stop state is established.

  In this embodiment, the voltage at which the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 is turned on (about 50% of the voltage supplied to the power supply) is the voltage at which the main control unit 300 is turned on (voltage supplied to the power supply). Therefore, before the main control unit 300 enters the power-on state (timing t3), the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is started by the external initialization signal (timing t2). However, since the wide range magnetic sensor 700 cannot receive the initialization signal from the main control unit 300 until the main control unit 300 is turned on, and the state of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is unknown, the timing of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 In the chart, a broken line is shown between timings t2 and t3. If the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 is in a power-on state after the main controller 300 is turned on, an initialization signal is sent to the main controller 300 from the start timing of the initialization process of the wide-area magnetic sensor 700. Entered. Further, when the initialization signal transmitted from the main control unit 300 is received and the initialization process is executed by the wide-range magnetic sensor 700, even if the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is turned on, the main control unit 300 receives the initialization signal. In some cases, magnetism is not detected until an initialization signal is received. The relationship between the power-on timing of the main controller 300 and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 and the start of the initialization process by the initialization signal is the same in the following embodiments.

  At timing t4, the user program starts executing in the main control unit 300 (that is, main control unit main processing starts), and the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is initialized at timing preceding timing t5 (here, timing t5 ′). The processing is completed, and the magnetic detection is possible.

  Timing t6 is a state in which the front frame door 106 is closed, a signal (door closing signal) of the front frame door opening sensor 109 is input to the main control unit 300, and the door sensor is CLOSE (L level).

  During the period from timing 0 to t6, other processing (for example, initialization processing of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700, etc.) is performed regardless of the signal (door state signal) of the front frame door opening sensor 109 (either OPEN / CLOSE). This is an executable period (OPEN / CLOSE unrelated period of the front frame door opening sensor 109), and the OPEN / CLOSE unrelated period ends at timing t6.

  A door state signal is transmitted from the front frame door opening sensor 109 to the control means (here, the main control unit 300) connected to the front frame door opening sensor 109. The timing at which the door state signal is transmitted from the front frame door opening sensor 109 to the main control unit 300 is the timing at which the detection state of the front frame door opening sensor 109 has changed. Accordingly, a door state signal (door opening signal) is transmitted to the main control unit 300 when the closed front frame door 106 is opened, and a door state signal (door is opened when the opened front frame door 106 is closed. Close signal) is transmitted to the main controller 300.

  In addition, when the power is turned on with the door open, the door remains open even after a certain time (for example, the timer interrupt interval (100 ms) of the payout controller 600) has elapsed since the door open was detected. When the door is open, a door open signal is output.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control unit main process is started in the main control unit 300 at timing t6 (for example, when the main control unit main process is started at timing t4 as shown in the figure). The door state signal from the front frame door opening sensor 109 is input to the main control unit 300. On the other hand, when the main control unit main process is not started, the door state signal is not output. Therefore, strictly speaking, the main control unit 300 is in an unknown state (open / closed) of the front frame door 106 until the main control main process is started.

  When the front frame door 106 is opened at timing t <b> 7, a signal (door open signal) from the front frame door open sensor 109 is input to the main control unit 300. Thereby, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stops the magnetic detection operation. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 and the front frame door opening sensor 109 are connected via the main control unit 300, and when the front frame door 106 is in the open state (the door sensor is OPEN), For example, the input signal of the first input terminal IN1 of the magnetic sensor 700 becomes H level. As a result, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stops the detection operation.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the wide range magnetic sensor 700 and the front frame door opening sensor 109 are directly connected, the front frame door 106 is in an open state (the door sensor is OPEN). The input signal of the first input terminal IN1 of the magnetic sensor 700 becomes, for example, an H level, whereby the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stops detecting operation.

  When the front frame door 106 is closed at time t8 (the door sensor is CLOSE), an initialization signal is input to the first input terminal IN1 of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 based on this, and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 executes the initialization process. .

  When the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is completed at timing t9, the magnetic detection operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 can be executed.

  In this example, a period from timing 0 to timing t6 (timing t6 ′) (a period until the front frame door 106 is closed and the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 can detect magnetism) is an initialization operation when the power is turned on. This is a period, and the period after the timing t6 ′ is a period in which the magnetic sensor 700 can detect magnetism. The wide range magnetic sensor 700 according to the present embodiment executes the initialization process associated with the power-on of the pachinko machine 100 from timing t2 to t5 ′ during the initialization operation period when the power is turned on. This initialization process is executed regardless of the state of the front frame door 106. On the other hand, in the magnetism detection possible period (after timing t6 ′) of the wide range magnetic sensor 700, it operates according to the state of the front frame door 106. That is, the period from timing t7 to t8 is a period in which the front frame door 106 is open, and during this period, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stops the magnetic detection operation. In the period from timing t8 to t9, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 executes initialization processing based on the closing of the front frame door 106. In addition, after completion of the initialization process (after timing t9), the wide range magnetic sensor 700 can execute the magnetic detection operation.

  Further, the solenoid and the rendering means are in an operable state after timing t3, and the initialization processing of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 (initialization processing during the initialization operation at power-on (timing t2 (or t3) to t5 ′) ) Even during the initialization process (timing t8 to t9)) during the magnetic detection possible period, both the solenoid 332 and the rendering means can be operated (in any state of operation / stop). .

  As described above, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 according to this embodiment receives an initialization signal when a condition including that the front frame door 106 is closed and detects magnetism at a predetermined timing. To do. Further, the front frame door opening sensor 109 is a door state signal (a door opening signal or a door closing signal (the door is opened) indicating the state (open and closed state) of the front frame door 106 at a predetermined timing). Output a signal indicating not). The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 performs a magnetic detection operation stop or initialization according to the door state signal. That is, in the wide-area magnetic sensor 700, during the magnetic detection possible period (after timing t6 ′), when the front frame door 106 is opened (when a door open signal is input), the magnetic detection operation is stopped and the front frame door 106 is stopped. Is closed (a door closing signal (a signal indicating that the door is not opened), that is, when an initialization signal is input), the initialization of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is started.

  In addition, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 of the present embodiment can provide rendering means (for example, the rendering movable body 224, the speaker 120, and the various types) when a condition including that the front frame door 106 is closed is satisfied in the magnetism detection possible period. The output of the initialization signal to the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is continued even when the lamp 418 or the like is in operation. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly return to the game and not give the player a sense of incongruity. In addition, erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed.

  <Magnetic (magnet) error>

  The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment notifies a magnetic (magnet) error when abnormal magnetic (magnet) is detected by the wide range magnetic sensor 700. The generation requirement of the magnetic (magnet) error is that the magnetic detection signal changes from OFF to ON when the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is ON) and the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor is completed (main control unit 300 Is received) and the state continues for a certain time (for example, 100 ms).

  The operation of the main control unit 300 that has detected magnetism (received a magnetic detection signal from the wide-range magnetic sensor 700) outputs an external terminal board signal (security information signal) described later to an external device (for example, a hall computer). Then, a command (error command) relating to the occurrence of an error is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the operation of the main control unit 300 is stopped (game is not possible).

  The return condition of the magnetic (magnet) error is when the power is shut off and then turned on again. The return operation of the main control unit 300 performs the same operation as the initial power on at the initial start, and the return start At that time, the operation of the main control unit 300 before the error starts is resumed.

  <Example 2 of timing chart>

  FIG. 20 is another example of a timing chart from when the power is turned on to when the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is in a magnetic-detectable state in the second embodiment of the signal output related to the wide-range magnetic sensor shown in FIG. Here, a part of the description overlapping with the timing chart of FIG. 19 is partially omitted, and a part different from the timing chart of FIG. 19 will be mainly described.

  When the power is turned on at timing t1, the voltage starts to rise gradually. When the voltage supply (voltage increase) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 50%) at timing t2, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 executes an initialization process as an initialization operation when the power is turned on.

  When the voltage supply (voltage rise) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 70%) at timing t3, the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-on state. As a result, PW_WATCH is turned on (H level). Further, the solenoid 332 and the rendering means are operable. The solenoid 332 and the rendering means are operable during the period from timing t3 to t8.

  At timing t4, the user program starts executing in the main control unit 300 (that is, main control unit main processing is started), and at a timing preceding timing t5 (here, timing t5 ′), the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is turned on. The initialization process in the initializing operation at that time is completed, and the magnetic detection is possible.

  At timing t <b> 6, the front frame door 106 is closed, and a signal (door closing signal) from the front frame door opening sensor 109 is input to the main control unit 300. In the period from timing 0 to t6, the front frame door 106 may be closed or open.

  That is, during the period from timing 0 to t6, other processing (for example, initialization processing of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700, etc.) is performed regardless of the signal (door status signal) of the front frame door opening sensor 109 (either OPEN / CLOSE). Is an executable period (OPEN / CLOSE unquestion period of front frame door opening sensor 109), and the OPEN / CLOSE unquestion period ends at timing t6.

  A door state signal is transmitted from the front frame door opening sensor 109 to the control means (here, the main control unit 300) connected to the front frame door opening sensor 109. The timing at which the door state signal is transmitted from the front frame door opening sensor 109 to the main control unit 300 is the timing at which the detection state of the front frame door opening sensor 109 has changed. Accordingly, a door state signal (door opening signal) is transmitted to the main control unit 300 when the closed front frame door 106 is opened, and a door state signal (door is opened when the opened front frame door 106 is closed. Close signal) is transmitted to the main controller 300.

  In addition, when the power is turned on with the door open, the door remains open even after a certain time (for example, the timer interrupt interval (100 ms) of the payout controller 600) has elapsed since the door open was detected. When the door is open, a door open signal is output.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control unit main process is started in the main control unit 300 at timing t6 (for example, when the main control unit main process is started at timing t4 as shown in the figure). The door state signal from the front frame door opening sensor 109 is input to the main control unit 300. On the other hand, when the main control unit main process is not started, the door state signal is not output. Therefore, strictly speaking, the main control unit 300 is in an unknown state (open / closed) of the front frame door 106 until the main control main process is started.

  When the front frame door 106 is opened at timing t <b> 7, a signal (door open signal) from the front frame door open sensor 109 is input to the main control unit 300. When the door opening signal is input, the main controller 300 outputs a magnetic detection operation stop signal to the door opening sensor, and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stops the magnetic detection operation.

  When the front frame door 106 is closed at timing t8, an initialization signal is input from the main control unit 300 to the wide range magnetic sensor 700 based on this, and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 executes initialization processing. Here, the period from the timing t8 to t9 is a period during which the operation of the solenoid 332 and the rendering means is prohibited. When at least one of the operations of the solenoid 332 and the rendering means is detected, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is used. The process of canceling the initialization process is performed. At timing t8, the solenoid 332 and the rendering means may stop operating.

  When the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is completed at timing t9, the magnetic detection operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 can be executed. At this timing, the period during which the operations of the solenoid 332 and the rendering means are prohibited ends. Note that when the solenoid 332 and the rendering unit perform the process of stopping the operation at the timing t8, the solenoid 332 and the rendering unit may execute the process of making both the operable states.

  As described above, during the initialization operation when power is turned on (from timing t2 (or t3) to t5 ′), the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 executes the initialization process regardless of the state of the front frame door 106, and the solenoid 332 And the production means is in an operable state. On the other hand, during the magnetic detection possible period, during the period in which the front frame door 106 is opened (period from timing t7 to t8), the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stops the magnetic detection operation and the front frame door 106 is closed. On the basis of this (timing t8), that is, when the front frame door opening sensor 109 transmits a door closing signal to the main control unit 300, the main control unit 300 transmits an initialization signal to the wide range magnetic sensor 700. Executes the initialization process, and the magnetic detection operation can be executed after the initialization process is completed (after timing t9).

  Further, in this example, when the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is performing the initialization process (period from timing t8 to t9) in the magnetism detectable period, the operations of the solenoid 332 and the rendering means are performed during the initialization process. Ban. That is, a process for stopping the operation of the solenoid 332 is performed, and a production means (for example, the production movable body 224, the speaker 120, various lamps 418, etc.) also performs a process for stopping the operation. Then, after the timing t9 when the initialization process of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is completed, the period during which the operation of the initialization process of the solenoid 332 and the rendering means is prohibited ends.

  <Example 3 of timing chart>

  FIG. 21 is another example of a timing chart from when the power is turned on to when the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is in a magnetic-detectable state in the second embodiment of the signal output related to the wide-range magnetic sensor shown in FIG. Here, a part of the description overlapping with the timing chart of FIG. 19 is partially omitted, and a part different from the timing chart of FIG. 19 will be mainly described.

  When the power is turned on at timing t1, the voltage starts to rise gradually. When the voltage supply (voltage increase) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 50%) at timing t2, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 executes an initialization process as an initialization operation when the power is turned on.

  When the voltage supply (voltage rise) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 70%) at timing t3, the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-on state. As a result, PW_WATCH is turned on (H level). Further, the solenoid 332 and the rendering means are operable (until timing t8).

  At timing t4, the user program starts executing in the main control unit 300 (that is, main control unit main processing is started), and at a timing preceding timing t5 (here, timing t5 ′), the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is turned on. The initialization process in the initializing operation at that time is completed, and the magnetic detection is possible. The period from timing 0 to t6 is the same as in the above embodiment.

  When the front frame door 106 is opened at timing t7, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stops the magnetic detection operation. However, when the front frame door 106 is closed at timing t8, that is, the front frame door opening sensor 109 is opened. When the closing signal is transmitted to the main control unit 300, the main control unit 300 transmits an initialization signal to the wide range magnetic sensor 700, and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 executes an initialization process.

  When the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is completed at timing t9, the magnetic detection operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 can be executed. During the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 from timing t8 to t9, the operation of the solenoid 332 is prohibited, and when the operation of the solenoid 332 is detected, a process of canceling the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is performed. Do. On the other hand, the operation of the rendering means is not prohibited, and the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is continued in any state of operation / stop. It should be noted that during the period from t8 to t9, the operation of the solenoid 332 may be stopped, and the rendering means may be in an operable state (any state of operation / stop).

  As described above, during the initialization operation at the time of power-on including the period from timing 0 to t6, the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 executes the initialization process regardless of the state of the front frame door 106, and the solenoid 332 and the rendering means. Is ready for operation. On the other hand, during the magnetic detection possible period, during the period in which the front frame door 106 is opened (period from timing t7 to t8), the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stops the magnetic detection operation and the front frame door 106 is closed. Based on the above (timing t8), the wide range magnetic sensor 700 executes the initialization process, and the magnetic detection operation can be performed after the initialization process is completed (after timing t9). In this way, during the power-on period of the pachinko machine 100, the wide area magnetic sensor 700 executes an initialization process each time the front frame door 106 is opened and closed.

  Further, in this example, when the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is performing the initialization process (period from timing t8 to t9) in the magnetism detectable period, the operation of the solenoid 332 is prohibited and the operation of the solenoid 332 is performed. If there is, the initialization process is stopped, but the operation of the rendering means is not prohibited, and the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is continued in any state of operation / stop. Then, after the timing t9 when the initialization process of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is completed, both the solenoid 332 and the rendering means are operable.

  In this example, only the solenoid 332 is disabled during the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 during the magnetic detection possible period, but only the rendering means is disabled during the initialization process during the initialization process. The initialization process of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 may be continued in any state of / stop. Also, during the initialization process of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 during the magnetic detection possible period, only the rendering means may be in an operation stop state and the solenoid 332 may be in an operable state.

  <Signal Output Flow for Wide-Range Magnetic Sensor (Example 3)>

  FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the flow of signal output related to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 in the pachinko machine 100 having the control unit having the circuit configuration shown in FIG. 4, and the first input terminal of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 in the initialization process. The flow of signals input to IN1 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, for example, the front frame door open sensor 109 is a door state signal (door open) indicating the state (open and closed) of the front frame door 106 at a predetermined timing (at a predetermined cycle). Signal or door closing signal) is output to the dispensing control unit 600, and the dispensing control unit 600 transmits a door state command (door opening command or door closing command) to the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 that has received the door state command outputs a door state signal to the wide range magnetic sensor 700.

  The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 executes a magnetic detection operation stop or initialization according to the input door state signal. That is, when the front frame door 106 is opened (when a door open signal is input), magnetic detection is prohibited, and when the front frame door 106 is closed (when a door close signal is input), a wide range magnetic sensor. 700 initialization is started. When the main control unit 300 transmits a door closing signal indicating that the front frame door 106 has been closed to the wide range magnetic sensor, the main control unit 300 transmits an initialization signal in a signal transmission process subsequent to the door closing signal. Alternatively, the initialization signal may be transmitted (simultaneously) by signal transmission processing for transmitting a door closing signal. The wide range magnetic sensor 700 stores the threshold value (first value) in storage means (for example, RAM) inside the sensor.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the configuration of FIG. 6A, when the initialization signal is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the wide range magnetic sensor 700, the initialization feedback signal (hereinafter referred to as “initialization FB”). May be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of connections between the substrates when the initialization FB signal illustrated in FIG. 22B is transmitted. FIG. 23A illustrates an example of wiring between the substrates and signals. FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram showing an example of connector wiring between the boards.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when the initialization signal output from the main control unit 300 is returned to the main control unit 300 as an initialization FB signal, the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 and a wide range magnetic sensor 700 is connected via a first relay board 702 and a second relay board 704. The main board 156 is connected to the first wiring 7081 and the second wiring 7082 via the first relay board 702 and the second relay board 704. The first wiring 7081 is a wiring for transmitting an initialization signal from the main board 156 to the wide range magnetic sensor 700, and the second wiring 7082 is a wiring for transmitting a magnetic detection signal from the wide range magnetic sensor 700 to the main board 156.

  The first relay board 702 is a board on which the disconnection monitoring circuit 706 is mounted, and the second relay board 704 is branched from the first wiring 7081 and connected to the disconnection monitoring circuit 706 of the first relay board 702. The third wiring 7083 is provided on the substrate. The third wiring 7083 is also a wiring that connects the disconnection monitoring circuit 706 and the main board 156.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, for example, the main board 156 and the first relay board 702 are connected to each other by board-to-board connectors 710 and 712 (or harnesses) and stored in the main board case 158. The first relay board 702 and the second relay board 704 are connected with respective connectors 714 and 716 by harnesses, and the second relay board 704 and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 are connected with respective connectors 718 and 720 by harnesses. .

  In this way, the initialization signal first wiring 7081 output from the main control unit 300 is branched, and the branched wiring (third wiring) is connected to the main control unit 300 as the initialization FB signal wiring. To do. The third wiring 7083 is connected to the main control unit 300 via the disconnection monitoring circuit 706 mounted on the first relay board 702. Thus, when an initialization signal is output from the main control unit 300 to the wide range magnetic sensor 700, an initialization FB signal is transmitted to the main control unit 300. When the initialization signal (signal input status) input to the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is compared with the initialization FB signal (signal input status) returned to the main control unit 300, if these do not match, Although there is a high possibility that an abnormality (for example, disconnection such as connector disconnection) has occurred, according to the present embodiment, the abnormality can be detected.

  In addition, by mounting the disconnection monitoring circuit 706 on the first relay board and inputting the initialization FB signal, the connector or harness connecting the disconnection monitoring circuit 706 and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is disconnected or disconnected. Can be monitored.

  That is, when the disconnection monitoring circuit 706 detects that the initialization signal is input to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 but the initialization FB signal is not input to the main control unit 300, the connector 714 of the first relay board 702 It can be determined that the harness connecting the connector 716 of the second relay board 704 is disconnected or that the connectors 714 and 716 are disconnected. That is, it is possible to detect a signal transmission error that the magnetic detection signal detected by the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300 due to the disconnection of the connectors 714 and 716 or the occurrence of disconnection of the harness connecting them.

  In this embodiment, the case where the disconnection monitoring circuit 706 is mounted on the first relay board 702 is shown as an example. However, the disconnection monitoring circuit 706 may be mounted on the main board 156 or the second relay board. 704 may be implemented.

  <Example 4 of timing chart>

  FIG. 24 is an example of a normal timing chart in the third embodiment of the signal output related to the wide range magnetic sensor shown in FIG.

  In the figure, the voltage level (ON / OFF) of the power supply from above, the state of the signal PW_WATCH (ON / OFF) input from the power supply board to the main control unit 300, the state of the front frame door open sensor 109 (door sensor) (open) OPEN indicating the state / CLOSE indicating the closed state), receiving state (reception / non-reception) of the payout command transmitted by the payout control unit 600 in the main control unit 300, input state of the initialization FB signal (on (input) / off) (Non-input)) The state of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 (magnetic sensor), the state of the initialization signal that the main control unit 300 outputs to the wide range magnetic sensor 700 (ON (output) / OFF (non-output)), the first sub-control The error command transmission state (on (transmission) / off (non-transmission)) to the unit 400 (and / or the second sub-control unit 500), the state of the solenoid 332 (on / off) It shows the timing chart. In addition, (IN) attached to each label of PW_WATCH, door sensor, initialization FB, and magnetic sensor means that these signals are signals input to the main control unit 300, and initialization, error, solenoid (OUT) attached to the label means that this signal or command is a signal or command output from the main control unit 300.

  First, the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off at timing 0, and when the power is turned on at timing t1, the voltage starts to gradually increase. In the period from timing 0 to t1, when the power is turned on at timing t1, the voltage starts to gradually increase. When the voltage supply (voltage increase) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 50%) at the timing t2, the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 is turned on.

  When the voltage supply (voltage rise) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 70%) at timing t3, the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-on state. As a result, PW_WATCH is turned on (H level).

  Further, at this timing, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 executes an initialization process as an initialization operation when the power is turned on. The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is in the power-on state at timing t2, but the initialization signal and the initialization FB signal are the wide-range magnetic sensor after timing t3 when the power of the main control unit 300 is turned on when the power is turned on. Since it is detected at 700 (since the initialization signal is not detected from timing t3 to t3), the initialization process is also executed from timing t3.

  At timing t4, the user program of the main control unit 300 (that is, main control main process) starts executing. After this timing, transmission of the initialization signal (and the initialization FB signal) from the main control unit 300 is prohibited during the period up to timing t6.

  At a timing preceding timing t5 (here, timing t5 ′), the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 completes the initialization process in the initialization operation when the power is turned on, and at timing t5 thereafter, the main controller 300 performs main control unit main processing. The processing (FIG. 6) starts executing, and the prohibition of transmission of the initialization signal is released at timing t6. Further, at the timing t6, the front frame door 106 is in a closed state.

  In this example, a period from timing 0 to timing 6 ′ after timing 6 is an initialization operation period when the power is turned on, and after timing 6 ′ is initialization of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 due to the closed state of the front frame door 106. This is a process executable period (an initialization process completion operation period from the closed state of the front frame door 106).

  The period from timing 0 to t6 is a period during which other processing (for example, initialization processing of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700, etc.) can be performed regardless of the signal (door state signal) from the front frame door opening sensor 109. OPEN / CLOSE unrelated period of the frame door opening sensor 109), and the OPEN / CLOSE unrelated period ends at timing t6.

  In this embodiment, the door state signal of the front frame door opening sensor 109 is transmitted to the main control unit 300 by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit 600 and further received by the main control unit timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. To do.

  The timing at which the door state signal is transmitted from the front frame door opening sensor 109 to the dispensing control unit 600 is the timing at which the detection state of the front frame door opening sensor 109 has changed. Therefore, a door state signal (door opening signal) is transmitted to the dispensing control unit 600 when the closed front frame door 106 is opened, and a door state signal (door is opened when the opened front frame door 106 is closed. Close signal) is transmitted to the payout controller 600.

  In addition, when the power is turned on with the door open, the door remains open even after a certain period of time (for example, the timer interrupt processing interval (100 ms) of the payout controller 600) has elapsed since the door open was detected. When the door is open, a door open signal is output.

  That is, when the main control unit main process has started in the main control unit 300 at the timing t6, the door state signal from the front frame door opening sensor 109 is input to the main control unit 300. On the other hand, when the main control unit main process is not started, the door state signal is not output. Therefore, strictly speaking, the main control unit 300 is in a state in which the state (open / closed) of the front frame door 106 is unknown until the timer interruption process of the first payout control unit 600 is executed.

  Note that the door state signal is always transmitted from the front frame door opening sensor 109 to the control means (here, the dispensing control unit 600) connected to the front frame door opening sensor 109.

  At timing t7, the main control unit 300 receives the payout command output by the payout control unit 600 in the main control timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) after the completion of the initialization operation when the power is turned on.

  Further, at timing t8 and timing t9, the main control unit 300 monitors the initialization FB signal (acquires the initialization FB signal and monitors whether both match with each other). That is, the main control unit 300 acquires an initialization FB signal (timing t8) in the main control timer interrupt processing during reception of the payout command after completion of the initialization operation at power-on (timing t8), and the next main control timer interrupt processing An initialization FB signal is acquired (timing t9) at (timing when the payout command is not received (falling)).

  Further, a signal (door state signal) from the front frame door opening sensor 109 is acquired at the falling timing of the payout command (second monitoring timing t9 of the initialization FB signal), and the open state of the front frame door 106 is determined. Monitor. That is, the main control unit 300 monitors both the door state signal and the initialization FB signal in the main control unit timer interrupt process (timing t9). By doing in this way, it can make it difficult to receive the influence of noise.

  Note that the main control unit 300 may monitor the front frame door opening sensor 109 at timing t7 and timing t8. That is, the main control unit 300 acquires a signal (door state signal) from the front frame door opening sensor 109 in the main control timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) after completion of the initialization operation when the power is turned on (timing t7). In the next main control timer interruption process (FIG. 7), a signal (door state signal) from the front frame door opening sensor 109 is acquired (timing t8), and the open state of the front frame door 106 is monitored. Thus, by monitoring the state of the front frame door 106 twice (continuously) at a predetermined cycle (cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt process), it is possible to make it less susceptible to noise.

  The monitoring of the state of the front frame door 106 (acquisition of a signal (door state signal) from the front frame door opening sensor 109) may be performed only once, or may be performed twice or more. Further, the period for acquiring the door state signal is not limited to the period of the main control unit timer interrupt process, and may be, for example, the reception period of the payout command transmitted from the payout control unit 600. Here, the payout command is received in a period from timing t7 to t9, a period from timing t11 to t12, and a period from timing t14 to t15. In these cases, the period for acquiring the door state signal (period for monitoring the front frame door 106) is a constant period (a constant interval), but this period may be random.

  Also, the initialization FB signal may be acquired only once or twice or more. Further, the period for acquiring the initialization FB signal is not limited to the period of the main control unit timer interrupt process, and may be, for example, the reception period of the payout command transmitted from the payout control unit 600. In these cases, the period for acquiring the initialization FB signal is a constant period (a constant interval), but this period may be random.

  When the door state signal is CLOSE (door closing signal) and the initialization FB signal is received at timing t9, the main control unit 300 is initialized at timing t10 after a predetermined time (for example, 4 ms for one interrupt) has elapsed. The signal is output to the wide range magnetic sensor 700. More specifically, the main control unit 300 outputs an initialization signal to the wide range magnetic sensor 700 in the next main control unit timer interrupt process after the monitoring of the door state signal and the initialization FB signal is completed. That is, the period from the timing when the monitoring of the door state signal and the initialization FB signal is completed (here, timing t9) to the timing when the main control unit 200 outputs the initialization signal to the wide range magnetic sensor 700 (timing t10) is the maximum. Thus, it is the timer interruption period of the main control unit 300 (4 ms in this embodiment). The output initialization signal is input to the main controller 300 as an initialization FB signal.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 again initializes the door state signal and the initialization in a period (a period from timing t10 to timing t12) until the next payout command reception including a period in which the initialization signal is output to the main control unit 300. Monitor the FB signal. Further, during this period (period from timing t10 to timing t12), the operation of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is stopped.

  When the transmission of the initialization signal is completed at timing t12 (when the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 completes reception of the initialization signal), the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 starts the initialization process. At this timing, the initialization signal and the initialization FB signal are turned off. The main control unit 300 again monitors the door state signal and the initialization FB signal during the period from the timing t12 to the timing t15 until the next payout command reception including the initialization process period of the wide range magnetic sensor 700. .

  At timing t15, when the initialization process is completed and the front frame door 106 is in the closed state, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 performs a magnetic detection operation.

  In the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 executes the initialization process twice (including the initialization process in the initialization operation at the time of power-on), and then the power of the pachinko machine 100 is shut off. Until then, the initialization process of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is not executed.

  Even if the condition for outputting the initialization signal is satisfied at timing t10, for example, when the solenoid 332 is operating, the main control unit 300 stops outputting the initialization signal. Also, during the initialization process (during the initialization process from timing t12 to t13) after the initialization operation at the time of turning on the power is completed is a period during which the operation of the solenoid 332 is prohibited. If the solenoid 332 starts operating during this period due to power recovery, the initialization process being executed is stopped, and the main control unit 300 again monitors the door state signal and the initialization FB signal (here, timing t7). Process from (after).

  In the present embodiment, the timing when the power supply state of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is turned on (timing t2) is earlier than the timing when the power supply state of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on (timing t3). May be the same, and the timing at which the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 is turned on (timing t2) may be later than the timing at which the pachinko machine 100 is turned on (timing t3).

  Further, a door state signal is always transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. The wide range magnetic sensor 700 starts an initialization process when an initialization signal is input from the outside when the power is turned on.

  As described above, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 of the present embodiment receives an initialization signal from the main control unit 300, for example, when the second condition including that the front frame door 106 is closed is satisfied. Yes, the first value (threshold value) is stored in the storage means by the input of the initialization signal. The wide range magnetic sensor 700 detects magnetism at a predetermined timing, compares the detected magnetism value (second value) with a threshold value stored in the storage means, and detects the magnetism value detected. When the value exceeds the threshold value (when the first condition is satisfied), a magnetic detection signal is output to the control unit.

  <Example 5 of timing chart>

  FIG. 25 is another example of the timing chart in the third embodiment of the signal output related to the wide-range magnetic sensor shown in FIG. 22, and the process when the front frame door 106 is opened during the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700. An example is shown.

  Each label of the timing chart is the same as that of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. Also, the operation during the initial operation period at the time of power-on from the timing 0 to the timing t6 ′ is the same as that in the fourth embodiment shown in FIG.

  The main control unit 300 receives a payout command in the period from the timing t7 to t9, the period from the timing t11 to t12, and the period from the timing t14 to t15 after the end of the initial operation period when the power is turned on. The main control unit 300 receives signals from the front frame door opening sensor 109 (door state signals) at the falling timings t9, t12, and t16 of the payout command (same timing as the second monitoring timing of the initialization FB signal). And the state of the front frame door 106 is monitored.

  Further, the main control unit 300 acquires an initialization FB signal in the main control timer interrupt process after completion of the initialization operation at power-on (timing t8), and initializes FB in the next main control timer interrupt process. The signal is acquired (timing t9) and the initialization FB signal is monitored. In the present embodiment, for example, the initialization FB signal is monitored by two main control unit timer interruption processes in accordance with the reception timing of the payout command. That is, the initialization FB signal is monitored by two main control unit timer interrupt processes at timings t11 ′ and t12, and the initialization FB signal is respectively received by two main control unit timer interrupt processes at timings t15 and t16. Monitor.

  The two initialization FB signals acquired at the time of receiving the payout command and at the fall of the payout command (timing t8, t9) are both off (non-input), and the door state signal acquired at timing t9 is When the closed state is indicated (the door sensor is CLOSE), an initialization signal (and an initialization FB signal) is transmitted to the wide range magnetic sensor 700 (timing t10).

  In addition, the two initialization FB signals acquired during reception of the payout command and at the fall of the payout command (timing t11 ′, t12) are both on (input), and the door state signal acquired at timing 12 is When the open state is indicated (the door sensor is OPEN), the main control unit 300 stops transmitting the initialization signal and stops the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700.

  The two initialization FB signals acquired during reception of the next payout command and at the fall of the payout command (timing t15, t16) are both off (non-input), and the door state acquired at timing t16. When the signal is in the closed state (the door sensor is CLOSE), the initialization signal (and the initialization FB signal) is transmitted to start the initialization process of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 (timing t17).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the front frame door 106 is opened during the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 after the initialization operation at the time of turning on the power is completed, The initialization process is stopped, and a retry operation for repeatedly monitoring the door state signal and the initialization FB signal is repeated at a predetermined cycle (in accordance with the payout command reception timing here). The retry operation is repeatedly executed until the initialization operation is completed. In this example, the timing 0 to the timing t6 ′ are the initialization operation period when the power is turned on, and the timing processing from the timing t6 ′ to the timing t16 is the execution and stop operation of the initialization process due to the front frame door 106 being opened from closing. This is a period, and the period after timing t16 is the first period of the retry operation.

  <Example 6 of timing chart>

  FIG. 26 is another example of the timing chart in the third embodiment of the signal output related to the wide-range magnetic sensor shown in FIG. 22 and shows an example of processing when the initialization signal of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is abnormal.

  Each label of the timing chart is the same as that of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. Also, the operation during the initial operation period at the time of power-on from the timing 0 to the timing t6 ′ is the same as that in the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. In this example, the timing chart of the payout command is not shown.

  After the initial operation period at the time of power-on is completed, the main control unit 300 monitors the initialization FB signal in two main control unit timer interrupt processes (acquires the initialization FB signal, (Compare) is (timing t7, t8), but in this monitoring, the mismatch between the initialization FB signal and the initialization signal (ON / OFF) is more than a certain time (for example, 8 ms = 2 times of main controller timer interrupt processing) If detected, an error notification is issued to notify disconnection of the connector connecting the main board 156 (main board case 158) and the relay board (for example, the second relay board 704, see FIG. 23) or disconnection of the harness. To do.

  In this example, the initialization FB signal is on (input) and the initialization signal is off (non-input). However, the initialization FB signal is off (non-input) and the initialization signal is Even when ON is F (input), the connection is abnormal, so error notification is executed.

  <Example 7 of Timing Chart>

  FIG. 27 is another example of the timing chart in the third embodiment of the signal output related to the wide-range magnetic sensor shown in FIG. 22, and shows an example of processing when power interruption and power recovery occur during the big game.

  Each label of the timing chart is the same as that of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. Further, the operation during the period from the timing 0 to the timing t3 is the same as that in the fourth embodiment of FIG.

  In this example, the jackpot game is executed in a period preceding the timing t4, and the main controller 300 is disconnected at the timing t4. The power supply is lowered, the PW_WATCCH signal is turned off, and the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 stops operating although it is originally operating for a period of time (for example, magnetic detection operation) as indicated by the broken line. Further, for example, the solenoid 332 that is performing the opening / closing operation of the attacker A during the big hit game stops the operation.

  When the power is turned on again after a predetermined time has elapsed (timing t6), the voltage gradually rises, and when the power supply (voltage rise) reaches a constant rate (for example, about 50%) at timing t7, The wide range magnetic sensor 700 is turned on. At timing t8, when the voltage supply (voltage rise) of the power source reaches a certain ratio (for example, about 70%), the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. As a result, PW_WATCH is turned on (H level), and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 receives the initialization signal from the main control unit 300 in the power-on state and starts executing the initialization process.

  The initialization process in the period from timing t9 to t10 ′ is the same as the initialization process in the initialization operation period at power-on shown in FIG. 24 and the like, regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106 (from timing t4). When the user program of the main controller 300 starts executing at timing t9, transmission of the initialization signal (and initialization FB signal) from the main controller 300 is prohibited.

  At timing t10, the main control unit main process starts executing again, and returns to the state before power interruption at timing t11. That is, the solenoid 332 starts operating again, the opening / closing operation of the attacker A and the like are executed, and the jackpot game is continued. The transmission prohibition of the initialization signal (and initialization FB signal) from the main control unit 300 is released at timing t12 after returning to the state before power interruption. The payout command is received at timing t14, and the initialization FB signal is monitored by the main control unit timer interrupt processing during the payout command reception (timing t15, t16). The same timing t16 as the second initialization FB signal (payout command) The main control unit 300 monitors the state of the front frame door 106 at a timing t16) when the front frame door 106 falls. When the front frame door 106 is closed and the initialization FB signal is off (non-input), the initialization signal is output to the wide range magnetic sensor 700 and the initialization process is executed (timing t17).

  FIG. 28A is a timing chart showing the start timing and end timing of the big hit game. In FIG. 28 (a), in order from the top, a special symbol changing signal, a condition device operation signal, an accessory continuous operation device operation signal, a special electric agent release signal, a special electric agent operation signal, an attacker A ( For example, a first variable winning opening 234 (or second variable winning school 235)) and an attacker solenoid signal are shown.

  Special symbol changing signal, condition device activation signal, accessory continuous activation device activation signal, special electric accessory release signal, special electric accessory activation signal are signals as seen from the game rules. If it is on, the special symbol display device is in operation, and if it is off, it is inactive (stopped). If the condition device activation signal is ON, the attacker A is operating (opening operation, maintaining the open state, closing operation, maintaining the closed state), and if OFF, it is not operating (closing) . In addition, if the accessory continuous operation device activation signal is ON, the special electric accessory has been activated a plurality of times. The special electric accessory release signal is a signal that maintains the open state of the special electric accessory. If the special electric accessory operating signal is on, the attacker A is in the opening operation, maintaining the open state, or in the closing operation, and if off, the attacker A is in the closing state. The special symbol fluctuation signal, the condition device activation signal, the accessory continuous activation device activation signal, the special electric accessory release signal, and the special electric accessory activation signal are signals output to an external device (for example, a hall computer). It is.

  The “opening” of the attacker A shown in FIG. 28A corresponds to the opening operation or maintaining the open state, and the “closing” of the attacker A corresponds to the closing operation or maintaining the closed state. Also, the attacker solenoid signal shown in FIG. 28A is a signal for maintaining the open state, which is transmitted to the solenoid that opens and closes the attacker A. An arrow A in FIG. 28A corresponds to the fixed display time of the stop symbol of the special figure. The arrow B corresponds to a jackpot game start effect time (a jackpot start display time). An arrow C corresponds to the closing operation time of the attacker A. The arrow D corresponds to a jackpot game end effect time (a jackpot end display time). The arrow E corresponds to the special display fluctuation display waiting time, and when there is a special figure 1 or special figure 2 suspension, the special symbol fluctuation starts after the fluctuation display start waiting time elapses. See the dotted line part of the signal).

  The start timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the special figure changing signal is turned off, the timing when the condition device activation signal is turned on, or the accessory continuous actuation device activation signal is It may be the timing when the special electric accessory release signal is first turned on, or the timing when the special electric accessory operating signal is first turned on. Alternatively, it may be the timing when the attacker A starts the first opening, or the timing when the attacker solenoid signal is first turned on.

  On the other hand, the end timing of the jackpot game may be the timing when the condition device operation signal is turned off, the timing when the accessory continuous operation device operation signal is turned off, or the condition device operation signal. And / or when the accessory continuous actuating device activation signal is on, it may be the timing at which the special electric accessory release signal is finally turned off from on, or the condition device activation signal and / or the instrument continuous signal When the actuator activation signal is on, it may be the timing when the special electric instrument operating signal is finally turned off from the on state, or the condition apparatus activation signal and / or the accessory continuous actuator activation signal may be In the case of being on, it may be the timing at which the last time the attacker A changed from “open” to “closed”, or the condition device activation signal and / or the accessory link When the actuator operation signal is on, it may be the timing when the attacker solenoid signal is finally turned off from on, or the condition device operation signal and / or the continuous object operation device operation signal is off. Therefore, it may be the timing when the variable waiting time has elapsed.

  Note that the initialization process of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 may not be executed during the opening / closing operation of the attacker A from the end of the period of the arrow B to the start of the period of the arrow C (during the big hit game). Further, the initialization process may be executed at the end of the opening / closing operation of the attacker A (at the end of the big hit game, at the start of the arrow C).

  FIG. 28B is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by an ellipse indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG. Even when the special electric accessory release signal is turned off, the special electric accessory operating signal is on for a while (here, the period of the arrow a). During the period indicated by the arrow a, the attacker A performs a closing operation and an opening completion effect (for example, a display effect) of the attacker A is executed. Note that the period indicated by the arrow a may be only the period during which the attacker A performs the closing operation. The period of the arrow b elapses from when the special electric accessory operating signal is turned off to when it is turned on. The interval between rounds corresponding to the interval between rounds may be a period indicated by an arrow b shown in FIG. 28 (b), or a period obtained by combining the arrows a and b shown in FIG. 28 (b). May be.

  It should be noted that the opening period of the attacker A (open state maintaining period) shown in FIG. 28 corresponds to a period (long period) in which the game ball can easily enter. is there. On the other hand, there are cases where the opening period of the attacker A is a period (short period) in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter. Hereinafter, the opening of the attacker A during this period may be referred to as a paca.

  The start timing of one round may be when the special electric accessory release signal is turned on or when the special electric accessory operating signal is turned on, and the attacker A is released. The case may be a case where the attacker solenoid signal is turned on.

  The end timing of one round may be when the special electric accessory release signal is turned off or when the special electric accessory operating signal is turned off, and the attacker A is closed. The case may be the case where the attacker solenoid signal is turned off.

  FIG. 29 is another example showing the arrangement of the attacker unit 800 and the wide range magnetic sensor 700. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged near the center of the game board 200, and an attacker unit 800 including an attacker 802 is arranged on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. A wide range magnetic sensor 700 is embedded in the attacker unit 800.

  FIG. 30 is a front view showing a part of the attacker unit 800 shown in FIG. 29 as seen through. In this attacker unit 800, whether or not it is possible to enter the specific area (probability changing operation area) 808 is assigned by the operation of the structure (the opening / closing operation of the first attacker 802 and the second attacker).

  As shown in FIG. 30 (a), an attacker unit 800 is provided on the front upper side, and an attacker (first attacker) 802 having a door member 802a that opens and closes so as to be visible to the player, and the door member 802a are operated. A solenoid 332A, an attacker (second attacker) 804 provided with a shutter-type door member 804a that is invisible to the player inside the first attacker 802, a solenoid 332B that operates the door member 804a, A shutter 806 that enables or disables entry into a specific area (probability changing operation area 808) provided in the lower left part of the second attacker 804, a solenoid 332 C that operates the shutter 806, and a second attacker 804 The ball detection sensor 320a that detects the game ball that has entered, and the probability change operation area 808 is entered. And the ball detection sensor 320b for detecting the game balls were, but enters the second attacker 804 and a ball detection sensor 320c for detecting the game balls that did not enter the probability variation operation area 808.

  When the predetermined symbol combination is displayed on the special figure display device (the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214), the second attacker 804 is released and the attacker unit 800 releases the game ball. When the player enters the probability changing operation region 808 in the second attacker 804, the condition device (see FIG. 29) is activated, and the accessory continuous operation device (see FIG. 29) is activated (that is, the big hit game is started). be able to). In this way, whether or not the game ball can enter the probability changing operation region 808 is divided by the opening pattern of the shutter 806.

  Here, as an example, a big hit A that allows a decorative symbol combination to enter the probability changing operation region 808 with a probable big hit, a big hit B that allows a decorative symbol combination to enter the positive changing operation region 808 with a normal big hit, and a decoration The case where there is a big hit C that the symbol combination of the symbols is a normal big hit and cannot enter the probability variation operating region will be described. In the case of big hit A, it is informed that it is a probable big hit by the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol display device (Special Fig. 1 display device 212, Special figure 2 display device 214) It is informed that it is possible to enter the operation area 808, and in the case of big hit B, the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed of the normal big hit and the special symbol display device (special 1 display device 212 and special figure 2 display device 214) that it is possible to enter the probability variation operating region 808, and in the case of big hit C, the big hit is usually a big hit by the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 And the special figure display devices (the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214) are not allowed to enter the probability variation operating region 808. It is reported is.

  That is, the opening pattern of the 1st attacker 802 and the 2nd attacker 804 is determined for every design. Then, the second attacker 804 is released in a predetermined round during the big hit, the shutter 806 at the back of the second attacker 804 is opened, and the game ball enters the probability changing operation region 808, so that after the big hit ends (see FIG. 28). The operation of the probability changing function starts after the accessory continuous operation device shown in FIG.

  For example, when the opening / closing pattern of the jackpot A attacker is 1R to 12R and 14R, the first attacker 802 opens and closes, and in 13R and 15R, the second attacker 804 opens and closes, and the second attacker In a pattern in which the shutter 806 is opened after 804 is opened, at 13R and 15R in the big hit A, the second attacker 804 is opened and the shutter 806 is opened. Then, when the ball detection sensor 320b detects that the game ball has entered the probability changing operation region 808, the operation of the probability changing function starts after the end of the big hit (the accessory continuous action device stops operating). In this way, whether or not the game ball enters the probability variation operating region 808 is divided according to the opening pattern of the attacker (the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804) and the shutter 806, so that the big hit that the shutter 806 opens (In the above example, the big hit A, B), the game ball may not enter the probability variation operating region 808 (it does not become the probability variation big hit), but on the other hand, the big hit that cannot enter the probability variation operating region 808 (in the above example Even if it is a big hit C), it may enter the probability variation operating region 808 irregularly.

  In addition, when the release of the shutter 804a of the second attacker 804 corresponds to 1R, and the game ball enters the probability variation operation region 808, the mechanism after 2R may be started.

  In such an attacker unit 800, the solenoid 332A for operating the first attacker 802, the solenoid 332B for operating the second attacker 804, and the solenoid 332C for operating the shutter 806 are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. Has been. Each solenoid 332A to 332C is formed with a magnetic field MF as indicated by a thick broken line. And the wide range magnetic sensor 700 of this embodiment is arrange | positioned in the position (In this example, the upper right end part of the attacker unit 800) which is not influenced by the magnetic field MF of each solenoid 332A-332C. The wide-area magnetic sensor 700 is most preferably arranged with its lower end face parallel to the horizontal direction, but the lower end face may be arranged inclined with respect to the horizontal direction.

  <Example of error>

  FIG. 31 is a table showing an example of an error notified by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The errors reported by the pachinko machine 100 are a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) disconnection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, a winning rate (general winning entry, start opening 2, large There is an error such as a prize opening (attacker).

  The magnetism (magnet) detection error is an error that occurs when magnetism (magnet) is detected by the wide range magnetic sensor 700 of the present embodiment. The switch (sensor) unconnected error is an error that occurs when a switch (sensor) power supply is supplied and an unconnected state of the panel switch (sensor) is detected. A magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor detects a magnetic field (radio wave). The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning rate error errors, the error of the general winning opening is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is an abnormal value, and the error of the starting port 2 is when the normal electric accessory is not operating. Is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected, and the error of the big prize opening is an error that occurs when the number of winning prizes in the big prize opening is an abnormal value.

  In this example, the top level (magnetism (magnet) detection error) in the table of FIG. 10 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is prohibited from operation (not playable). However, another error may be the highest priority error.

  The details of each error occurrence condition, return condition, operation at the time of detection in the main controller 300, and operation at the time of return of the main controller 300 are as shown in FIG. Note that “when the winning end display period ends” in the return condition of the single winning error of the big winning opening (attacker) means that the end display period of the big winning or the small winning end has ended, as shown in FIG. Applicable after the period of arrow D shown in FIG. FIG. 28 (a) shows the signal status during the big hit game, but the timing is the same as that shown in FIG. 28 (a) since the same timer is used for the big hit. . However, in the case of a small hit, the condition device operation signal, the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, the special electric accessory release signal, and the special electric accessory operating signal are off.

  Next, errors that can be detected by the payout control microcomputer 770 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control microcomputer 770. FIG. 32B shows a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which are conditions for generating a door opening error. It is the figure which showed the combination. Note that “stopping the firing stop” in the figure is synonymous with turning off the firing permission signal.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 can output errors of various devices detected in the device monitoring process (step S232) to the payout control unit 600. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 770 is similar to the main control unit 300. , Tray full tank error (bottom plate full tank error), dispensing device error, excessive dispensing error, unauthorized dispensing error, dispensing number switch error, main control communication error, CR unit disconnected error, CR unit communication error, magnetic error error, external It is possible to detect clock error errors, magnetic field error errors, switch level error errors, frame opening errors (front frame door opening errors), switch disconnection errors, impact sensor errors, and so on. In addition to these errors, the payout control microcomputer 770 can also detect a main control communication error when the communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 is not received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example). . Each error occurrence condition, return condition, payout operation, and launch operation are as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2B shows details of the glass frame opening error state, the inner frame opening error state, and the door opening error state.

  In addition, the relationship between the magnetic detection error (magnetic error) based on the detection result of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 of this embodiment and the other errors shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 is as follows.

  Magnetic detection errors include other errors (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection errors, switch disconnection errors (errors related to connector disconnection or disconnection of devices controlled by the main control unit), shock abnormality errors, payout control communication errors, switch levels. (Error error, winning rate error error, door opening error, upper plate full error), the priority may be higher, but the priority may be the same.

  In addition, when a magnetic detection error and a magnetic field detection error occur at the same time, if the magnetic field detection error first satisfies the output condition, the magnetic detection error operation is executed after the magnetic field detection error operation is executed. It may be. In that case, all the devices (decorative symbol display device 208, lamps 418, 532, notifications from the magnetic field detection error to the magnetic detection error) notified by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 are used. 542 and speaker 120, etc.) may be switched (overwrite data), only one or more of some devices (eg, speaker 120) will be overwritten and the other device or devices may detect magnetic fields. The error notification may be continued.

  <Example of display during game>

  33 to 35 are diagrams showing an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 during one game in time series.

  Referring to FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 of the present embodiment has a special display area below the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. A special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 and a variable icon display area 800 that suggest the number of holds in FIG. 1 are provided. In the present embodiment, four hold icons that are the maximum number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game can be displayed in one special figure 1 hold icon display area (hold icon display area) 900, and the display area 900 is displayed. The area is roughly divided into four areas: a first area 900a, a second area 900b, a third area 900c, and a fourth area 900d. The first area 900a to the fourth area 900d correspond to the first to fourth hold orders of the special figure 1 variable game, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold (stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area 900a. Similarly, in the second to fourth areas 900b to 900d, 2 to 4 hold icons can be displayed. Each hold icon corresponding to the eye hold can be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 that suggests the number of reservations of special figure 2 is provided in the display area on the right side of the right symbol display area 208c. As in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 can display four hold icons that are the maximum number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 holding icon display area 902 is not displayed when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0, and is displayed when the holding of the special figure 2 increases. In the following description of the present embodiment, an example of a change in the state of each component (for example, an example of a change in the display of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900) accompanying the increase or decrease of the special figure 1 hold will be described. When there is an increase / decrease in the holding of the special figure 2, it can be displayed in the same manner. For convenience of explanation, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 may be simply referred to as a hold icon display area 900 in some cases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth graphic for special figure 1 for suggesting that the display area above the special figure 2 holding icon display area 902 is during special figure 1 variable game (during special figure 1 fluctuation). A display area 208e, a special symbol 2 4th symbol display area 208f for suggesting that the game is in the special figure 2 variable game (during the special figure 2 change), ), And a general-purpose fourth symbol display area 208g. The special symbol 1 4th symbol display area 208e turns off (or flashes) the image of ○ during the special game 1 variable game, and lights up the image of ○ when the special game 1 variable game is stopped. Similarly, the 4th symbol display area 208f for special figure 2 displays an image of △, and the 4th symbol display area 208g for general graphic displays an image of ◇, and is turned off (or blinked) during each variable game. Lights up when is stopped.

  Also, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device 210 are provided. Above these display devices, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and a general figure holding lamp 216 are provided.

  These configurations are the same as those in the tenth embodiment unless otherwise specified.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights two LEDs to notify that there are two holdings in the special figure 1. Both the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the ordinary figure holding lamp 216 are turned on, and it is informed that both the special figure 2 and the ordinary figure holdings are 0.

  The 4th symbol display area 208e for the special figure 1 (and the 4th symbol display area 208f for the special figure 2 and the 4th symbol display area 208g for the special figure) is lit up to notify that the variable game has stopped. Yes. In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4 -decoration 1 -decoration 7”, which is a combination of disparate decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the hold icon display area 900 (the first area 900a and the second area 900b), the hold icons PI1 and PI2 of FIG. 1 are shown, respectively.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5A, a circular (sphere) hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900. In addition, a circular hold icon PI2 is displayed in the second area 900b.

  Next, in the timing shown in FIG. 5B, one special figure hold is consumed, the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 2 to 1, and the first special figure display device 212 displays the symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 turns off one of the two LEDs, turns on one LED, and the fourth graphic display area 208e for the special figure 1 is in the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates that the image of ○ is off (or flashing).

  In the hold icon display area 900, the timing shown in FIG. 6C is the movement animation between the hold and change icons in which the hold icon PI1 of the first area 900a corresponding to the digested hold moves to the change icon display area 800 ( Alternatively, the hold icon deletion animation) and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b moves to the first area 900a are shown. Specifically, an animation in which the hold icons PI1 and PI2 move to the right side is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variation icons and the movement animation of the hold icons are continuously executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state where the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are completed. That is, the fluctuation icon CI is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800, the hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b is deleted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (f) is a state in which the decorative symbol variable display shown in FIG. 1 is started in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is shown. As shown in (b) to (f) in the figure, in the present embodiment, when the hold is digested, first, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is displayed. After the light is turned off, the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 turns off the image of ○ (or blinks). Thereafter, the hold icon PI executes animations of movement, change, and deletion, and thereafter, the symbol variation display of the decorative symbols is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. Any of these state changes may be executed first in a sequential manner, and may be executed in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least some may be performed simultaneously.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G shows a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 (in this example, the chance button is displayed) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. Image).

  In addition, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (this In the example, blue is displayed below the first operation means image BG1. This timing is the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. In addition, an image of the character (donor) is also displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds as the reception period) has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image. The TG1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 (execution of a decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is executed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I is in the state before the time further elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 (for example, before the reception period of 6 seconds elapses) (FIG. ) Shows a state in which the chance button 136 has been operated. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, A character display “Chance!” And a character image (dono) are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. This notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed. Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where a notice effect is displayed as an example, another effect display may be sufficient.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 6 (j) and (k) are in a state in which an effect corresponding to the result of determination of success / failure, the variation time and the winning notice effect is started, triggered by the operation of the chance button 136. In the same figure, (j) and (k) show an example of reach display in the variation display of the decorative symbols.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L is the start state of super reach production, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white background), and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, a small display (decreasing display of decorative symbols) is displayed in the lower right of the display area. Further, the hold icon display area 900, the change icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the change icon CI are hidden (erased). Note that the hold icon display area 900, the change icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, the change icon CI erase timing, the white back timing, and the decorative symbol reduction display timing are the first to be executed sequentially. It may be executed in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least some may be performed simultaneously. In addition, the hold icon display area 900, the change icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the change icon CI may be displayed during the super reach production, or some of them may be hidden.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 34 (m), FIG. 34 (n), FIG. 34 (o) to FIG. 34 (q), for example, the execution of a swordsman reach production that confronts a swordsman character with a sword is started. It is in a state. Here, as an example, the swordsman character and the character “VS swordsman” are displayed (FIG. 33 (m)), and then the confrontation scenes of the character (dono) and the swordsman character are displayed (FIG. 33 (n) to FIG. 34 (). q)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 34 (q) displays a scene in which the character (dono) wins over the swordsman character. In FIG. 34 (r), a combination of symbols (for example, a promising big hit) is displayed in a reduced display of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7”) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (s) changes the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in FIG. 4 (t) hits the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 ( After the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is displayed in a swinging manner, the ornamental symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (v), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the “probability big hit” character for notifying the start of the big hit is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 34 (t) ′ to FIG. 34 (v) ′ is continued from FIG. 34 (s) when the big hit reach effect (the reach effect of the decoration 6) is started in FIG. 33 (k). It is timing. This timing is displayed after the jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is shaken and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208 ((t) ′ in the figure). A decorative symbol stop display is performed ((u) 'in the same figure), the decorative symbol stop display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and a "big hit" character for notifying the start of the big hit is displayed (same as above) FIG. (V) ′).

  FIG. 35 shows a display example when the swordsman reach production is out of place.

  The timing shown in FIG. 35 (a) is the timing following FIG. 34 (p), and displays a scene in which the character (dono) loses to the swordsman character. Further, in FIG. 35B, the fluctuation display of the shifted symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is displayed in the reduced display of the ornamental symbol, and the timing shown in FIG. The entire display area of the symbol display device 208 is changed to white.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed with a swinging variation display of a combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) and a hold icon display. The hold icon PI1 is displayed again in the area 900, and the change icon CI is displayed again in the change icon display area 800. Moreover, in the same figure (e), the stop display of a decoration symbol is performed in the symbol display area 208a-208c, and the image of (circle) is light-displayed in the 4th symbol display area 208e for special figures.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 5 (f) and (g) indicate that, in the change icon display area 800, the change icon deletion animation executed when the special icon change game ends and the change icon CI is deleted. The executed state is shown, and the timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which the deletion animation of the variation icon is completed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the variation icon CI is erased after the special symbol variation is stopped. However, the variation icon CI is erased at other timing (for example, after the decorative symbol is stopped displayed or during the variation of the decorative symbol). Etc.). Further, the change icon CI may be deleted in one frame instead of the change icon deletion animation.

  <Example of error notification / When only a magnetic detection error is notified>

  FIG. 36 shows a display example when only the magnetic detection error occurs during the game shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the magnetic detection error. The description of “main: magnetic detection OFF” in the figure indicates that there is no abnormal magnetic detection signal input from the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 to the main control unit 300 (the main control unit 300 has not detected magnetism) “Main: magnetic detection ON” indicates that there is an abnormal magnetic detection signal (the main control unit 300 detects magnetic detection).

  FIG. 36A shows, for example, the timing shown in FIG. This timing indicates a state in which the player has started an illegal act of bringing the magnet close to the front frame door 106, and the main control unit 300 has not detected any abnormal magnetism.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state where the player continues cheating with a magnet. At this timing, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 detects abnormal magnetism, but the magnetic detection state of the main control unit 300 remains off (no abnormality). This is because, in the wide range magnetic sensor 700, the period during which the solenoid cancel function is executed (for example, 100 ms), the time during which the magnetic detection signal is transmitted from the wide range magnetic sensor 700 to the main control unit 300 after the solenoid cancel function ends, This is because a time lag from magnetic detection in the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 occurs due to the period of the control unit timer interrupt process (for example, 4 ms; monitoring timing of the magnetic detection signal).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is an abnormal magnetism after the main control unit 300 receives the magnetic detection signal until 100 ms elapses and after 100 ms elapses (see the magnetic detection error occurrence condition in FIG. 31). And an error command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the error command notifies the decorative symbol display device 208 of a magnetic (magnet) error (character display of “magnet detected”). It shows the state. As described above, there may be a time lag from when the main control unit 300 transmits an error command to when it is received by the first sub control unit 400 and error notification is performed in FIG. The notification of the magnetism (magnet) detection error is performed by lighting the lamp 418 or outputting sound from the speaker 120 in addition to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which a player who performs an illegal act has separated the magnet from the front frame door 106. As shown in the figure, once a magnetic (magnet) detection error is notified, the error is not cleared unless the magnet is removed from the pachinko machine 100 and the power is turned off and turned on again.

  In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol variation display even during the occurrence of the magnet detection error. Since the magnet detection error is an error causing a game stop state, the symbol stop command is not sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed. (For example, after playing a series of videos (reach production and so on), the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as they are.) Also, since the game is stopped, the player enters the starting gate. In addition, the number of holds in the main control unit 300 is not stored, and the hold increase display such as the hold increase animation is not executed.

  If a magnetic detection error occurs as shown in FIG. 4D ', the effect display (including the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, the hold icon, etc.) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted. Alternatively, a display for a magnet detection error such as displaying a character display of “Magnet detected” with a blue screen background may be displayed.

  <Example of error notification / When a magnetic detection error and a magnetic field detection error occur simultaneously>

  FIG. 37 is a display example in the case where a magnetic detection error and a magnetic field detection error occur simultaneously during the game shown in FIGS. The description of “main: magnetic field detection OFF” in the figure indicates that the main control unit 300 does not detect an abnormal magnetic field, and “main: magnetic field detection ON” indicates that an abnormal magnetic field is detected. .

  FIG. 37A shows, for example, the timing shown in FIG. This timing indicates a state in which the player has started an illegal act of bringing both the magnet and the radio wave generator closer to the front frame door 106, and abnormal magnetic and magnetic fields are not detected in the main control unit 300.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state where the player continues cheating. At this timing, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 detects abnormal magnetism, but both the magnetic detection state and the magnetic field detection state of the main control unit 300 remain off (no abnormality). This is because, in the wide range magnetic sensor 700, the period during which the solenoid cancel function is executed (for example, 100 ms), the time during which the magnetic detection signal is transmitted from the wide range magnetic sensor 700 to the main control unit 300 after the solenoid cancel function ends, This is because a time lag from magnetic detection in the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 occurs due to the period of the control unit timer interrupt process (for example, 4 ms; monitoring timing of the magnetic detection signal). Similarly, there may be a time lag when detecting a magnetic field.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is monitored until 100 ms has elapsed since the main control unit 300 received the magnetic detection signal. After 100 ms, the main control unit 300 has entered the magnetic detection state, and the main control unit 300 has received the magnetic field detection signal. In this case, the state is monitored until 4 ms elapses and the magnetic field detection state is reached after 4 ms elapses. In this example, the case where the abnormal magnetism and the magnetic field are simultaneously detected by the main control unit 300 is shown as an example. However, there may be a time lag in detecting both of them.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the magnetic (magnet) error command notifies the decorative symbol display device 208 of the magnetic (magnet) error (character display of “magnet detected”). ) Is being performed. As described above, there may be a time lag from when the main control unit 300 transmits an error command to when it is received by the first sub control unit 400 and error notification is performed in FIG. Magnetic (magnet) error occurrence conditions (4 ms after the magnetic detection signal is turned on (received by the main control unit 300)), and magnetic field (radio wave) error occurrence conditions (magnetic field detection signal is on (the main control unit 300). When 4 ms elapses after the reception), a magnetic (magnet) error is notified based on the magnet detection command as shown in FIGS. In this way, when errors with different priorities occur at the same time, only errors with higher priority may be reported. The notification of the magnetism (magnet) detection error is performed by lighting the lamp 418 or outputting sound from the speaker 120 in addition to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, these error notifications are not canceled unless the player who performs the fraudulent action removes the magnet or the radio wave generator from the front frame door 106 and cuts off the power again. In this embodiment, the error is canceled only by turning off the power and turning it on again. However, the error may not be released unless the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM. The main controller may be provided with an error release switch so that the error is not released unless the power is turned on while operating the error release switch. The magnetic field detection error is canceled when the main control unit 300 transmits a command related to error cancellation to the first sub-control unit 400, but the main control unit 300 stops operation due to the magnetic detection error. Both errors are not cleared unless the power is turned off and then turned on again.

  When the timing at which the magnetism (magnet) is detected by the magnetic sensor and the timing at which the radio wave is detected by the magnetic field sensor are the same timing, the time until the main controller 300 receives the magnetism detection signal and the main controller Since the time until 300 receives the magnetic field detection signal is different, the magnetic detection error generation condition and the magnetic field error generation condition may be different. In such a case, a magnetic field detection error command based on the previously detected magnetic field detection signal is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 first, and the magnetic field detection transmitted first as shown in FIG. A magnetic field detection error is notified based on the error command. At the timing shown in FIG. 5E ', a magnetic detection error command based on a magnetic detection signal detected later is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and a magnetic detection error is also reported based on this command. The notification of the magnetism detection error is performed by lighting the lamp 418 or outputting sound from the speaker 120 in addition to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, (e), (e) 'of the same figure may alert | report only an error with high priority like a magnetic detection error like (e)' '.

  In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays both the magnetic detection error and the magnetic field detection error. However, only the error that has occurred first may be displayed or only the error with high priority may be displayed. . Further, the light emitting lamp pattern of the lamp 418 for notifying an error may be a common pattern for both errors or a different pattern. In this case, the light emission pattern of the magnetic field detection error that has previously been notified of the error may be overwritten with a lamp pattern of a high-priority error (magnetic detection error) that is to be notified later. In addition, the notification by the sound output from the speaker 120 outputs the sound of the magnetic field detection error, and then outputs the sound of the magnetic detection error. However, only high priority errors (magnetic detection errors) may be output as audio. Then, both voices of the error that has occurred may be output, and voices of errors that have occurred earlier or later may be output regardless of the priority.

  <Example of error notification / When a magnetic detection error occurs after a magnetic field detection error>

  FIG. 38 shows a case where a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs during the game shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, and then a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, and these errors are reported on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is a display example.

  FIG. 38A shows, for example, the timing shown in FIG. This timing indicates a state in which the player has started an illegal act of bringing the radio wave generator closer to the front frame door 106, and the main control unit 300 has not detected any abnormal magnetism or magnetic field.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state where the player continues cheating after (a). At this timing, an illegal act of bringing the magnet closer is started, and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 has detected abnormal magnetism, but both the magnetic detection state and the magnetic field detection state of the main control unit 300 are off (no abnormality). (Same as FIG. 37B).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which the main control unit 300 monitors the magnetic field detection signal until 4 ms elapses and enters the magnetic field detection state after 4 ms elapses, but is not in the magnetic detection state. Show. At this timing, the main control unit 300 transmits a magnetic field (radio wave) error command to the first sub control unit 400.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 4D, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the magnetic field (radio wave) error command notifies the decorative symbol display device 208 of the magnetic field (radio wave) error (character display of “radio wave detected”). ) Is being performed. The notification of the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is performed by lighting the lamp 418 or outputting sound from the speaker 120 in addition to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208. At this timing, 100 ms elapses after the main controller 300 receives the magnetic detection signal, and the magnetic detection state is set.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (e) satisfies the condition for generating a magnetic (magnet) error (after 100 ms has elapsed since the magnetic detection signal was turned on (received by the main controller 300)) (from the main controller 300). The magnetic detection error command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400), the magnetic field detection error display is hidden, and the magnetic detection error display is started.

  In addition, you may make it wait for notification of a magnetic detection error until the notification of the magnetic field detection error alert | reported previously is cancelled | released. Alternatively, a condition for occurrence of a magnetic detection error is established, but transmission of a magnetic detection error command from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 may be on standby. In this case, after the notification of the magnetic field detection error is canceled, the notification of the magnetic detection error is executed. In addition, these error notifications are not canceled unless the player who performs the fraudulent action removes the magnet or the radio wave generator from the front frame door 106 and cuts off the power again. The magnetic field detection error is canceled when the main control unit 300 transmits a command related to error cancellation to the first sub-control unit 400, but the main control unit 300 stops operation due to the magnetic detection error. Both errors are not cleared unless the power is turned off and then turned on again.

  Further, both a magnetic detection error and a magnetic field detection error may be displayed as shown in (e) ″.

  Also, if a high priority error (magnetic detection error) occurs while reporting a low priority error (magnetic field detection error), the error information of the low priority error is replaced with the error information of the high priority error. It is good also as what alert | reports an error with high priority by overwriting.

  In the above embodiment, the notification of the magnetic (magnet) detection error has been described by way of example by the first sub control unit 400, but may be executed by the second sub control unit 500.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present invention includes a door body (for example, front frame door 106) and output means (for example, main controller 300, front frame door opening sensor 109, A game stand including a door opening sensor 109 and an inner frame opening sensor) and a detecting means (for example, a wide range magnetic sensor 700), wherein the detecting means depends on the magnetic strength detected by the detecting means. , A means that may output a magnetic detection signal, wherein the magnetic strength is determined by a first value (for example, a threshold value) and a second value, and the second value is The magnetic value detected by the detecting means, and the output means is means for outputting at least an initialization signal when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is satisfied. At least one of the requirements The requirement (hereinafter referred to as “first requirement”) is a requirement including at least that the door body is closed, and the detecting means receives the initialization signal, A gaming machine characterized by being a means capable of outputting a magnetic detection signal.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the control means.

  Further, by determining the magnetic strength in a state where the magnetic field is stable, there is a case where erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed.

  The output means may not be a control means as long as it is a means for outputting an initialization signal to the detection means.

  The detection means may be a means for outputting a magnetic detection signal to the main control means. The detection means may be a means for outputting a magnetic detection signal to the payout control means.

  In addition, the requirement that the first condition is satisfied may be only the first requirement, or may be a plurality of requirements including the first requirement.

  The detection means is a means for outputting the magnetic detection signal when a second condition is satisfied, and the requirement for the second condition is that the second value is the first value. The requirement may include at least a value higher than one value.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection and perform stable control by determining the magnetic strength in a state where the magnetic field is stable.

  The detecting means is means for storing the first value when the initialization signal is input, and the detecting means is configured to store the magnetic detection signal after the first value is stored. It is good also as what is a means which can output.

  According to such a configuration, the first value (for example, a threshold value) can be stored in a state where the magnetic field is stable, so that erroneous detection may be prevented and stable control may be performed.

  In addition, variable entry means (for example, attacker A, second variable winning opening 234) is provided, and the variable entry means is means provided with at least a solenoid (for example, solenoid 332), and the solenoid operates. As a result, the variable entry means changes from one of the first state (for example, the closed state of the door member 234a) to the other state (for example, the opened state of the door member 234a). The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than in the first state, and among the requirements that the first condition is satisfied The at least one requirement (hereinafter referred to as “second requirement”) may be a requirement including that the solenoid of the variable pitching means is not operating.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed. In addition, while preventing fraud, there are cases where it is possible to advance the game so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  The power supply means (for example, power supply) is provided, and at least one of the requirements for satisfying the first condition (hereinafter referred to as “third requirement”) is the power supply of the power supply means. It may be a requirement that includes at least what has been done.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection and perform stable control by determining the magnetic strength in a state where the magnetic field is stable after the power is turned on.

  In addition, second detection means (for example, front frame door opening sensor 109) is provided, and the detection means is first detection means (for example, wide range magnetic sensor 700), and the second detection means. Is means for outputting at least a door opening signal when the door is opened, and the first requirement is a requirement including at least that the door opening signal is not output. It is good also as a thing.

  According to such a configuration, the strength of the magnetic field can be determined in a state where the magnetic field after the front frame door 106 is closed is stable, and erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed. is there.

  The first detection means is a detection means different from the second detection means, but the first detection means and the second detection means may indicate the same detection means.

  In addition, a game board (for example, the game board 200), an inner frame (for example, the main body 104), and an outer frame (for example, the outer frame 102) are provided, and the inner frame is at least stored in the outer frame. The game board is at least housed in the inner frame, and at least one of the requirements that satisfy the first condition (hereinafter referred to as “fourth requirement”). May be a requirement that includes at least that the inner frame is housed in the outer frame.

  The outer frame may be fixed to the island facility.

  Further, the inner frame may be attachable at least to a hinge provided on one end side of the outer frame.

  The door body may be at least attachable to a hinge.

  Further, either the inner frame or the outer frame may be provided with an inner frame opening sensor.

  Further, either the door body or the inner frame may be provided with a door opening sensor.

  Further, the detection means may not output the magnetic detection signal during a period in which the initialization signal is output.

  According to such a configuration, the strength of the magnetic field can be determined in a state where the magnetic field is stable. Thus, there are cases where erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed.

  Further, the game table may be a pachinko machine (for example, pachinko machine 100).

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present invention includes a door (for example, front frame door 106) and output means (for example, main control unit 300, door opening sensor 109, inner frame opening sensor). Detecting means (for example, wide range magnetic sensor 700) and a plurality of movable means (for example, attacker A, effect means (for example, effect device 206 including effect movable body 224, speaker 120, various lamps 418, etc.)), The detection means is a means that may output a magnetic detection signal depending on the magnetic strength detected by the detection means, and the magnetic strength is the first A value (for example, a threshold value) and a second value, and the second value is a magnetic value detected by the detection means, and the output means Was established In other words, it is means for outputting at least an initialization signal, and at least one of the requirements for satisfying the first condition (hereinafter referred to as “first requirement”) is that the door body is closed. The detection means is a means capable of outputting the magnetic detection signal when the initialization signal is input, and is one of the plurality of movable means. Even if the movable means (hereinafter referred to as “first movable means”) is in operation, the game machine is characterized in that the output means continues to output the initialization signal.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the control means.

  Further, by performing the operation of the movable means as it is during the initialization, it is possible to smoothly return to the game and continue the game as it is without giving the player a sense of incongruity. In addition, since the magnetic field can be detected in a state where the magnetic field is stable, erroneous detection may be prevented and stable control may be performed.

  A plurality of movable means may be provided. Here, the movable means may be a variable pitching means, and the variable pitching means may be an electric chew, an attacker, or a specific area (probability changing operation area). ) Attacker.

  The movable means may be a production means. Here, the effect means is means provided with drive means (motor, solenoid, etc.), and “effect means without drive means” is not included in the effect means described in this case. . Further, the drive means may indicate only the solenoid, but may include other drive means (such as a motor) including the solenoid as drive means.

  The detection means is a means for outputting the magnetic detection signal when a second condition is satisfied, and the requirement for the second condition is that the second value is the first value. The requirement may include at least a value higher than one value.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable while proceeding the game while preventing fraud. In addition, since the magnetic field can be detected in a state where the magnetic field is stable, erroneous detection may be prevented and stable control may be performed.

  The detecting means is means for storing the first value when the initialization signal is input, and the detecting means is configured to store the magnetic detection signal after the first value is stored. May be a means capable of outputting.

  According to such a configuration, since the first value can be stored in a state where the magnetic field is stable, there are cases where erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed.

  In addition, second detection means (for example, front frame door opening sensor 109) is provided, and the detection means is first detection means (for example, wide range magnetic sensor 700), and the second detection means. Is means for outputting at least a door opening signal when the door is opened, and the first requirement is a requirement including at least that the door opening signal is not output. , You can also.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable while proceeding the game while preventing fraud. In addition, since the magnetic field can be detected in a state where the magnetic field is stable, erroneous detection may be prevented and stable control may be performed.

  The output means is a control means (for example, the main control unit 300 or the sub-control unit), and at least one of the plurality of movable means is a second movable means (for example, a second control unit). The first movable means is a means controlled by the control means, and the second movable means is a means controlled by the control means, and the first movable means is 232). Even if at least one of the movable means and the second movable means is in operation, the output of the initialization signal by the control means may be continued.

  According to such a configuration, at least one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit is allowed to execute the operation as it is during initialization, so that the game can be continued as it is without giving the player a sense of incongruity. There is a case.

  The control means may be the first control means, but may be the second control means. The first control means may be a main control means, but may be a sub control means (sub control means). Further, the sub control means may be composed of a plurality of control means. The second control means may be a sub control means, but may be a main control means.

  In addition, a first control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) and a second control unit (for example, a sub-control unit), and at least one of the plurality of movable units is a third control unit Movable means (for example, the shielding device 246 or the effect movable body 224), and the control means is at least one of the first control means and the second control means, The first movable means is a means controlled by the first control means, and the third movable means is a means controlled by the second control means, and the first movable means The output of the initialization signal by the output means may be continued even when at least one of the third movable means is in operation.

  According to such a configuration, even when at least one of the first movable means and the third movable means is in operation, the initialization process is executed, so that the player can smoothly return to the game, and the player There is a case where the game can be continued as it is without feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since the magnetic field can be detected in a state where the magnetic field is stable, erroneous detection may be prevented and stable control may be performed.

  The first control means may be the main control means, but may be the sub control means (sub control means). Further, the sub control means may be composed of a plurality of control means. Further, the third control means may be a sub control means, but may be a main control means. The third control means may be the same control means as the second control means described above, or may be a different control means.

  In addition, a first control unit (for example, a main control unit 300) and a second control unit (for example, a sub-control unit) are provided, and the movable unit includes a plurality of movable units, and the plurality of movable units At least one of the means is the first movable means (for example, attacker A), and at least one of the plurality of movable means is the second movable means (for example, the shielding device 246 or the effect). The output means is at least one of the first control means and the second control means, and the first movable means is the first control means. The second movable means is a means controlled by the second control means, and is one of the first movable means and the second movable means. At least one is working Also, to continue the output of the initialization signal by the output section, it may be ones.

  According to such a configuration, even if at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means is in operation, the initialization process is executed, so that the player can smoothly return to the game, and the player There is a case where the game can be continued as it is without feeling uncomfortable. Since magnetism can be detected in a stable magnetic field, erroneous detection may be prevented and stable control may be performed. In some cases, the game can be continued as it is without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, a control unit (for example, the main control unit 300 or the sub control unit) is provided, and the output unit is the second detection unit (for example, the front frame door opening sensor 109), and the first unit The movable means may be a means controlled by the control means.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the game can be continued as it is without giving the player a sense of incongruity. In addition, since the magnetic field can be detected in a state where the magnetic field is stable, erroneous detection may be prevented and stable control may be performed.

  Further, at least one of the movable means is a variable pitching means (for example, attacker A), and the variable pitching means is a means provided with at least a solenoid (for example, a solenoid 332), and the solenoid operates. By doing so, the variable pitching means changes from any one of the first state (for example, the closed state of the door member 234a) to the other state (for example, the opened state of the door member 234a). The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the first state, and the first condition satisfies the requirements. At least one of the requirements (hereinafter referred to as “second requirement”) may be a requirement including that the solenoid of the variable pitching means is not operating.

  According to such a configuration, since the operation of the solenoid of the variable pitching means can be stopped during the initialization process, there is a case where erroneous detection due to the influence of magnetism of the solenoid can be prevented and stable control can be performed.

  The variable pitching means may be an electric chew, an attacker, or an attacker for a specific area (probability changing operation area).

  The power supply means (for example, power supply) is provided, and at least one of the requirements for satisfying the first condition (hereinafter referred to as “third requirement”) is the power supply of the power supply means. It may be a requirement that includes at least what has been done.

  According to such a configuration, since the magnetic field can be detected in a state where the magnetic field is stable, there are cases where erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed.

  In addition, a game board (for example, the game board 200), an inner frame (for example, the main body 104), and an outer frame (for example, the outer frame 102) are provided, and the inner frame is at least stored in the outer frame. The game board is at least housed in the inner frame, and at least one of the requirements that satisfy the first condition (hereinafter referred to as “fourth requirement”). May be a requirement that includes at least that the inner frame is housed in the outer frame.

  According to such a configuration, since the magnetic field can be detected in a state where the magnetic field is stable, there are cases where erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed.

  Further, the detection means may not output the magnetic detection signal during a period in which the initialization signal is output.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed by executing initialization while the magnetic field is stable.

  The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present invention includes a control unit (for example, main control unit 300), a first detection unit (for example, wide range magnetic sensor 700), and a second detection unit (for example). For example, a gaming table including a front frame door opening sensor 109) and a door body (for example, the front frame door 106), wherein the first detection means is means capable of detecting magnetism, The first detection means is a means capable of outputting a magnetic detection signal, and the second detection means outputs a door opening signal when detecting that the door body has changed from a closed state to an open state. The control means is means for determining a magnetic detection error on condition that the magnetic detection signal is input from the first detection means, and the control means State of the door opening signal by the second detecting means Is a means for determining that the door body has been closed when it is determined that the input body has changed from the input state to the non-input state, and the first detection means is configured to detect the first body after the door body is closed. The first detection operation after the first initialization operation has been executed is a device configured to be able to execute an initialization operation of the detection means (hereinafter referred to as a “first initialization operation”). The means is configured such that a magnetic value (hereinafter referred to as “second value”) detected by the first detection means is a value set by the first initialization operation (hereinafter referred to as “first value ( For example, it is a means that does not output the magnetic detection signal when the threshold value is lower than ")").

  According to such a configuration, the initialization operation (first initialization operation) is performed in a state where the magnetic field after the front frame door is closed is stable, and the magnetic field is set based on the value set by the initialization operation. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to prevent erroneous detection and perform stable control.

  The first detection means outputs a magnetic detection signal, the second detection means outputs a door opening signal, and the control means is a door body when the state of the door opening signal by the second detection means changes. Since the magnetic detection error is determined based on the magnetic detection signal output by the initialization operation of the first detection means after the door is closed, the error of the first detection means is determined. Detection may prevent the control means from determining that the state of the door opening signal has changed, for example, as a magnetic detection error, and may allow stable game control.

  The first detection means is configured to detect the magnetism after the first initialization operation is completed without performing the magnetic detection during the execution of the first initialization operation. It may be a means.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed.

  The first detection means is configured to be able to execute an initialization operation of the first detection means (hereinafter referred to as a “second initialization operation”) when the power is turned on. It may be a means.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection and perform stable control by determining the magnetic strength in a state where the magnetic field is stable after the power is turned on.

  Further, the first initialization operation may be an operation executed after the second initialization operation.

  Further, the first detection means is configured to detect the magnetism after the second initialization operation is completed without performing the magnetic detection during the execution of the second initialization operation. It may be a means.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed.

  In addition, the first detection unit after the second initialization operation is executed is configured such that the second value is a value set by the second initialization operation (hereinafter referred to as “third value ( For example, it may be a means that does not output the magnetic detection signal when it is lower than the threshold value.

  The first detection means after the second initialization operation is executed is a means for outputting the magnetic detection signal when the second value is higher than the third value. Also good.

  The first detection means receives a signal (hereinafter referred to as “first signal (for example, initialization signal)”) in a first period (for example, a period from timing t8 to t9 in FIG. 19). On the condition that the first initialization operation is performed, the first detection unit is configured to perform the first initialization operation when the first signal is changed from an output state to a non-output state. It may be a means for starting the initialization operation.

  The first detection means receives a signal (hereinafter referred to as “second signal (for example, initialization signal)”) in a second period (for example, a period from timing t2 to t5 in FIG. 19). On the condition that the second initialization operation is performed, the first detection means, when the second signal is changed from the output state to the non-output state, It may be a means for starting the initialization operation.

  The length of the first period may be different from the length of the second period.

  Further, the control means is means capable of outputting at least the first signal, and when the control means determines that the door is opened during the output of the first signal, the control means A means for stopping the output of the signal, and the control means outputs the first signal again when it is determined that the door is closed after the output of the first signal is interrupted, It may be a thing.

  According to such a configuration, the initialization operation (first initialization operation) is performed in a state where the magnetic field after the front frame door is closed is stable, and the magnetic field is set based on the value set by the initialization operation. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to prevent erroneous detection and perform stable control.

  The first detection means outputs a magnetic detection signal, the second detection means outputs a door opening signal, and the control means is a door body when the state of the door opening signal by the second detection means changes. Since the magnetic detection error is determined based on the magnetic detection signal output by the initialization operation of the first detection means after the door is closed, the error of the first detection means is determined. Detection may prevent the control means from determining that the state of the door opening signal has changed, for example, as a magnetic detection error, and may allow stable game control.

  The first detection unit may be a unit that stops the magnetic detection operation when the first signal is input by the control unit.

  The control means includes first control means (for example, the main control unit 300) and second control means (for example, the payout control unit 600), and the first control means includes a microprocessor (for example, And the microprocessor is configured to execute an operation based on a control program, and the control program includes a program that executes at least the second initialization operation. Also good.

  The control means may be a means for executing at least control for stopping a game when the magnetic detection signal is input by the first detection means.

  According to such a configuration, since the game (for example, the operation of the solenoid of the variable pitching means) can be stopped during the initialization process, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to the magnetic influence of the solenoid and perform stable control. There is a case.

  The first detection means after the first initialization operation is executed is a means for outputting the magnetic detection signal when the second value is higher than the first value. Also good.

  The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present invention includes a door (for example, front frame door 106), a control unit (for example, main control unit 300), and a first detection unit (for example, a wide range). A game machine including a magnetic sensor 700) and second detection means (for example, front frame door opening sensor 109), wherein the control means includes a microprocessor (for example, CPU 304); The first detection means is a means capable of detecting magnetism, and the first detection means is a means that may output a magnetic detection signal depending on the detected magnetic strength, and the second detection means The detection means is means for starting output of a door opening signal to the control means when the state of the door body is changed from a closed state to an open state, and the second detection means is a state of the door body. From the open state When the state changes to the closed state, the means for terminating the output of the door opening signal to the control means, and the control means outputs the door opening signal from the state of inputting the door opening signal. It is configured to determine that the door body is closed when the door opening signal is changed to a state in which the door opening signal is not input, and the magnetic strength is a first value (e.g., Threshold value) and a second value (for example, a detected magnetic value), and the first detection unit includes a storage unit (for example, a RAM) capable of storing the first value. The second value is a magnetic value detected by the first detection means, and the control means outputs an initialization signal when the microprocessor is reset. Output to the first detection means The first detection means is means for storing the first value in the storage means when the initialization signal is input, and the first detection means is the storage means. Is a means capable of outputting the magnetic detection signal when the second value is higher than the first value stored in the control means, and the control means determines that the door is closed. In this case, the game table is a means for outputting the initialization signal to the first detection means.

  Further, the microprocessor is configured to execute an operation based on a control program, the control program includes an initialization process program, and the initialization process is performed when the microprocessor is reset. The initialization process includes an output start process of the initialization signal, and “when the microprocessor is reset” according to claim 1, It may be “when the initialization signal output start processing is executed”.

  In addition, the first detection means has a period during which the initialization signal output from the control means is input (hereinafter referred to as an “input period”) than the first value. Even if the value is higher, the magnetic detection signal is not outputted to the control means, and the first detection means has finished outputting the initialization signal by the control means. Thus, after the input period ends, the magnetic detection signal may be output to the control unit when the second value is higher than the first value. .

  In addition, an inner frame (for example, main body 104) is provided, and the inner frame is supported by an outer frame (for example, outer frame 102) so as to be opened and closed. The door body is the inner frame. There may be.

  The glass frame is provided so as to be opened and closed by an inner frame supported to be opened and closed by an outer frame, and the door body is the glass frame. Good.

  The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present invention includes a door (for example, front frame door 106), a control unit (for example, main control unit 300), and a first detection unit (for example, a wide range). A game machine including a magnetic sensor 700) and second detection means (for example, front frame door opening sensor 109), wherein the control means includes a microprocessor (for example, CPU 304); The first detection means is a means capable of detecting magnetism, and the first detection means is a means that may output a magnetic detection signal depending on the detected magnetic strength, and the second detection means The detection means is means for starting output of a door opening signal to the control means when the state of the door body is changed from a closed state to an open state, and the second detection means is a state of the door body. From the open state When the state changes to the closed state, the means for terminating the output of the door opening signal to the control means, and the control means outputs the door opening signal from the state of inputting the door opening signal. It is configured to determine that the door body is closed when the door opening signal is changed to a state in which the door opening signal is not input, and the magnetic strength is a first value (e.g., Threshold value) and a second value (for example, a detected magnetic value), and the first detection unit includes a storage unit (for example, a RAM) capable of storing the first value. The second value is a magnetic value detected by the first detection means, and the control means outputs an initialization signal when the microprocessor is reset. Output to the first detection means The first detection means is means for storing the first value in the storage means when the initialization signal is input, and the first detection means is the storage means. Is a means capable of outputting the magnetic detection signal when the second value is higher than the first value stored in the control means, and the control means determines that the door is closed. In this case, the initialization signal is a means for outputting to the first detection means, and the control means has one condition that the magnetic detection signal is input from the first detection means. As a means for determining a magnetic detection error, and when the control means determines that the door is opened during the output of the initialization signal, the control means is a means for stopping the output of the initialization signal, The control means interrupts the output of the initialization signal. If it is determined that the door body is closed after being released, the initialization signal is output again.

  Further, the microprocessor is configured to execute an operation based on a control program, the control program includes an initialization process program, and the initialization process is performed when the microprocessor is reset. The initialization process includes an output start process of the initialization signal, and “when the microprocessor is reset” according to claim 1, This is a case where the output start process of the initialization signal is executed, and the first detection unit may automatically execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

  In addition, the first detection means has a period during which the initialization signal output from the control means is input (hereinafter referred to as an “input period”) than the first value. Even if the value is higher, the magnetic detection signal is not outputted to the control means, and the first detection means has finished outputting the initialization signal by the control means. After the input period ends, the magnetic detection signal can be output to the control means when the second value is higher than the first value. The means transmits a command (for example, an error command) indicating that the magnetic detection error has occurred to another control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) when it is determined that the magnetic detection error has occurred. It may be.

  In addition, an inner frame (for example, main body 104) is provided, and the inner frame is supported by an outer frame (for example, outer frame 102) so as to be opened and closed. The door body is the inner frame. There may be.

  The glass frame is provided so as to be opened and closed by an inner frame supported to be opened and closed by an outer frame, and the door body is the glass frame. Good.

  The gaming machine is a pachinko machine, and the first detection means is means for stopping the magnetic detection operation when the initialization signal is being output by the control means. The means may be means for executing at least control for stopping the game when the magnetic detection signal is input by the first detection means.

  Second Embodiment

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The same constituent elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. On the other hand, in the following drawings (FIGS. 39 to 54), when there are overlapping codes for configurations different from the first embodiment, the codes used in the second embodiment are given priority.

  39 to 41 are diagrams showing an outline of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 39, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment (and the first embodiment) initializes the wide range magnetic sensor 700 (wide range magnetic sensor 700) when the power is turned on (initial setting, initialization). Is executed. When the front frame door 106 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the initialization operation of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is executed again. Thus, the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is performed in a state where the magnetic field after the front frame door 106 is closed is stable, and the magnetic strength is determined based on the value set by the initialization operation. Therefore, there are cases where erroneous detection can be prevented and stable control can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment outputs a signal related to magnetic detection to the outside (for example, a hall computer) when the initialization operation (initial setting, initialization) of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is completed. To an external device 920). Thereby, accurate information regarding magnetic detection may be output to the external device. In addition, it may be easy to prevent erroneous detection of magnetism and stable control may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs an action (for example, a chance button 136 or a chance button 136) when the initialization operation (initial setting, initialization) of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is being executed. , Production movable body 224, etc.) may operate in parallel. When the processes are completed, a signal related to magnetic detection can be output to the outside (for example, an external device 920 such as a hall computer). Thereby, it may be difficult for the player to determine whether or not a signal for performing the initialization operation is output, and fraud may be prevented. Even if the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is interrupted due to some abnormality and resumed (retrying), the initialization operation abnormality (retrying) is caused by the execution of the accessory operation. May be obfuscated by the player. Furthermore, there is a case where the operation confirmation of the accessory etc. can be completed early while performing the initialization operation of the wide range magnetic sensor 700. These configurations will be specifically described below.

  <Processing at main controller power-on>

  Next, the main control unit power-on process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42 (a) is a flowchart of the main controller power-on process, FIG. 42 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 42 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S1101, stack pointer initialization is performed. In this stack pointer initial setting, a stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

  Subsequently, in step S1102, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (this value). In the example, it is determined whether or not it is 9V) or higher. When the voltage value of the power source is less than the predetermined value (step S1102: No), the process waits until the voltage value of the power source becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. When the voltage value exceeds the predetermined value (step S1102: Yes), The process proceeds to step S1103.

  In step S1103, internal register initialization is performed. In this internal register initial setting, the WDT 314 is activated, the access permission to the RAM 308, the numerical value that determines the execution period of the main control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later is set in each register of the timer circuit 312, the main control unit 300 After the initial setting of serial communication between the control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 and the processing such as setting the maximum value of the hardware random number, the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (the RAM clear is necessary) (step S1104: Yes), the process goes to step S1108 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary) (step S1104: No), the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether or not the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S1105: No), the process proceeds to step S1108 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state, and an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S1105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1106.

  In step S1106, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. It is determined whether or not the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is normal) (Yes in step S1106), the process proceeds to step S1107 to return to the state before power interruption. Execute startup processing. On the other hand, when the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal) (step S1106: No), the process goes to step S1108 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed.

  After the return activation process in step S1107 or the initial activation process in step S1108 is executed, a RAM clear process is performed in step SS1109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

  Subsequently, in step S1110, sub-control related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, the sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, processing for setting an initial value of the sub-control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

  In step S1111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, design data, firing position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, universal signal, normal electric accessory (second special figure starting port 232, electric chew) operating signal, normal figure operation Medium signal, easy winning status signal, special signal per special signal, special signal small hit signal (limited to models equipped with small hits), special signal changing signal, special signal variable time reduction status signal, special electric accessory (variable prize) Mouth 234, 235, attacker) operating signal, condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, prize winning port solenoid signal, normal electric accessory solenoid signal, symbol LED data, external terminal board signal (described later) ) Etc. are set for the output port. Moreover, after finishing the process of this step S1111, it transfers to the main control part main loop process of step S1112. Here, the winning easy state may indicate a power support state.

  <Return start processing>

  Next, the return activation process will be described with reference to FIG. When the return activation process is started, in step S1201, initial setting at the time of return activation is performed. Specifically, a process for setting information indicating “return start” in the power status information, a process for setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and a device error (an error flag due to magnetic detection, winning abnormality, etc.) A process for clearing, a process for clearing the previous device error status, a process for clearing the device error status for the security information signal, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, in step S1202, the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S1201 is set as an address for starting the RAM clear, and then the return activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (mainly set) to the stack pointer. In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in a sub-command transmission process in a timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. .

  <Initial startup process>

  Next, the initial activation process will be described with reference to FIG. When the initial activation process is started, initial setting of soft random numbers is performed in step S1301. Specifically, an initial setting of soft random numbers used in special drawing or ordinary drawing is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S1302, the addresses after the storage area that was initially set in step S1301 are set as addresses for starting RAM clearing, and then the initial activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the initial activation process, for example, setting of prohibition of interrupt, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial activation process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the subcommand setting transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 (step S1405). , The first sub-control unit 400 is transmitted.

  <Main control unit main loop processing>

  Next, the main control unit main loop process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process.

  When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above-described main control power-on process, in step S1401 of the main control unit main loop process for starting the execution of the main control unit main loop process, interrupt prohibition is performed. After the setting, in step S1402, the value of the WDT 314 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (restarted). In step S1403, basic random number initial value update processing is performed (step S1403). In this basic random number initial value updating process, an initial value generating random number counter for generating an initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and an initial value of the general figure determining random number counter is updated. The initial value generation random number counter can be updated by, for example, obtaining a value from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 and adding 1 to the obtained value when the numerical range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0-20. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In step S1404, after setting interrupt permission, in step S1405, a subcommand transmission process is performed. In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If there is a command to be transmitted, a process for transmitting the command is performed. In step S1406, other determination random number update processing is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S1407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure variation time determination random number and the normal diagram variation time determination random number is performed.

  In step S1407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (for example, 9V) or more. : Yes), the process returns to step S1401 to continue the main control unit main loop process, and if it is less than the predetermined value (step S1407: No), the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S1408, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the power status information is set to “suspend”. Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. Thereafter, after setting to prohibit access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is set.

  <Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms). The main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S1501, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S1502 and step S1503, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S1403 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is used. The special figure variation time determination random number counter and the normal figure variation period determination random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter. In order to determine this, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 2 may be provided separately.

  In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is limited (whether or not the first sub control unit 400 is activated). If the interrupt function is limited (the first sub control unit 400 is not activated). In the case (step S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1519. When the interrupt function is not limited (when the first sub-control unit 400 is activated) (step S1504: No), the process proceeds to step S1505. move on. Here, the interrupt function being limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 set in step S1110 of the power-on process (FIG. 42) is not 0, that is, step S1504. When it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S1505. If the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command for confirming whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated. If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (magnetic detection error in this embodiment) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S1505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1520. If the specific error is not occurring (step S1505: No), the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is counted for the time for displaying the symbol on the first symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed or stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S1507, processing such as input port status update is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), general map starting port 228, and out port 240 via the input port of the I / O 310. The RAM 308 monitors whether or not signals relating to switches such as the first variable winning opening (first attacker) 234, the second variable winning opening (second attacker) 235, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226) are input. Store in the signal state storage area.

  If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area. Further, when it is determined that the winning at the start opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area as being invalid is deleted.

  In step S1508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning award winning process, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S1507 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input. Note that if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it may be determined that there has been a prize.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S1507, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228.

  For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S1508, a winning opening counter updating process is also performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when there is a winning at the winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, the RAM 308 The value of the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting port is read, and 1 is added to set the original winning ball number storage area.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S1508, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In this winning acceptance process, whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235, The determination is made using the determination result whether or not the winning determination pattern information matches. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area.

  Further, when a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is read from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. Obtained as a random number value, obtains a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value, and stores it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made at the first variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the first variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the first variable winning opening. The same applies to the second variable prize winning opening 235. In addition, when the random number of a special figure is acquired, special figure prefetching processing (presence / absence judgment, symbol, prefetch lottery of variation time) is also performed.

  In step S1509, a prize-related error check process is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a prize-related abnormality is confirmed and monitored, and a process for setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S1510, out switch input update processing is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of game balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for production.

  In step S1511, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. In addition, as a command which the main control part 300 transmits to the payout control part 600, the communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control part 600) transmitted after progress of the starting waiting time of the 1st sub control part 400 after power activation is passed. And a command for notifying the starting method of the main control unit 300 (initial start and return start), and a prize ball number command for instructing payout of game balls for designated prize balls.

  The command received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 includes a communication confirmation return command (response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300), a test test signal Commands that contain information on the occurrence of commands (prize ball signal output request), information on the occurrence of payout errors (including no errors), and prize ball payout operation status commands (whether or not award balls are being paid out) And a command indicating that the payout is in progress (instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to turn on / off the LED).

  Next, in step S1512, special figure state update processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the special figure process state. The special figure state update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1513, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the off symbol. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the bellows member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the bellows member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), during the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec), the tongue member A signal for holding the tongue member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid 332 of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the normal state update process in the case where the normal is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S1514.

  In step S1513, a general drawing related lottery process is also performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S1514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S1507 are read, and the presence / absence of a predetermined error (for example, a magnetic detection error, a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error) is monitored. Device information indicating whether or not there is an error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning ports 234, 235, and the normal symbol display device 210, the first special special unit via the display circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various state display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S1515, external output signal management processing is performed. In the external output signal management process, a process for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal to the outside is performed. In step S1516, a subcommand management process is performed. In this sub-command management process, preparations for transmitting various commands to the first sub-control unit 400 are made. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, and bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a change stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included. In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the jackpot round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning ports 234, 235 Includes the presence or absence of a prize. In the present embodiment, when there is a prize at the first variable prize slot 234 and the second variable prize slot 235, a big prize slot prize command is set.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is selected by the 15R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process. The information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set.

  Further, in the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S1516, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S1517, display display setting processing is performed. In this display display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as “Number of reserved balls, combination of symbols”, status (during electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing to set data to be output. In step S1518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting a control signal set in each process to a solenoid or LED, a process of transmitting a prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S1519, a sub-control activation wait wait process is performed. In this sub-control activation wait process, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to start and become communicable, the sub-control activation wait counter is decremented by 1, and this activation wait counter becomes 0. If so, preparations for transmitting a predetermined command are made. Note that the predetermined command includes one or more commands such as a power-on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors have been canceled, a lower pan full error) A command indicating that there is a payout ball shortage error, a main control communication error command (a command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnected error And a launch position command (a command for notifying the launch position (right-handed or left-handed) according to a state such as during power support or during a right-handed state).

  In step S1520, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S1501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and then the process returns to the main control part main loop process. .

  <Main controller timer interrupt processing / external output signal management processing>

  Next, the external output signal management process (step S515) in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the flow of external output signal management processing.

  In the external output signal management processing, external terminal board signals 1 to 12 (see FIG. 46, details will be described later) are set and output. The external terminal board signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 is transmitted to an external device (hall computer) 920 via a data display or the like (not shown), and collected and managed by the external device 920.

  In step S1601, security information signal output setting processing is performed. In this security information signal output setting process, the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) is detected when the power is turned on or when an illegal action (for example, a magnetic detection error, a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error, a big error) is detected. Set for output.

  For example, when a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error is occurring (that is, when a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error is detected and an error flag is set in the device monitoring process of step S1514 in FIG. 44), the main control unit Every time the timer interrupt process is executed, this step is executed in the external output signal management process in step S515, and an external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) indicating that a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error has been detected. Is continuously output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  On the other hand, when a magnetic detection error is occurring (that is, when a magnetic detection error is detected and an error flag is set in the device monitoring process in step S1514 in FIG. 44), a magnetic field detection error is detected immediately after detection. In the main controller timer interrupt process, this step is executed in the external output signal management process in step S515, and the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) indicating that a magnetic detection error has been detected is output. In the part timer interrupt process, the determination in step S1505 results in Yes, and the processes from step S1506 to step S1518 are skipped. That is, when a magnetic detection error is occurring, the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) indicating that the magnetic detection error has been detected continues to be output until, for example, a power interruption state occurs.

  In the next step S1602, a symbol determination number information signal output setting process is performed. In this symbol determination number information signal output setting process, setting is made to output the external terminal board signal 3 (the symbol determination number information signal) when the variation of the special symbol stops.

  In the next step S1603, out-sphere information signal output setting processing is performed. In this out sphere information signal output setting process, setting is made to output the external terminal board signal 11 (out sphere information signal) when the total number of passages to the out port 240 becomes 10 or more. In the next step S1604, a firing position setting process is performed. In this launch position setting process, it is determined whether or not the electric support is in progress, or whether it is in a right-handed state, and in either case, it is in a right-handed state (otherwise, it is left-handed) Information to be displayed is set, and a process for transmitting the information to a test fire test signal or a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is performed.

  In the next step S1605, a trial test signal setting process is performed. In the test firing test setting process, a signal to be output to a test engine device (a signal during a big hit, an accessory continuous operation signal, etc.) is set.

  In the next step S1606, jackpot information signal output setting processing is performed. In this jackpot information signal output setting processing, jackpot information signals (external terminal board signal 4 (big jack 1 information signal), external terminal board signal 5 (big jack 2 information signal), external terminal board signal 6 (big jack 3 information signal)) Clear (initialize) and set the jackpot information signal. In this big hit information signal setting, in the case of big hit by the big hit symbol, the setting is made to output the external terminal board signal 4 (big hit one information signal). , Set to output the external terminal board signal 5 (big hit 2 information signal), and output the external terminal board signal 6 (big hit 3 information signal) when the special electric accessory is operating due to the small hit design Set up to do.

  In this step, other information signals are set. The other information signal is, for example, a prize ball information signal (external terminal board signal 1) output from the payout control unit 600, a door opening information signal (external terminal board signal 2), or another information signal (external terminal board signal 12). ) Is set. Then, the external terminal board signal set in the process so far is output to the outside through the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349 (see FIG. 4), and then the external output signal management process is terminated.

  Next, the external terminal board signal output to the outside by the pachinko machine 100 through the external terminal board will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing signal numbers, signal names, and output conditions of external terminal board signals.

  The external terminal plate 349 (see FIG. 4) has a plurality of (in this example, 12) input ports (inputs) that can receive external terminal plate signals output from the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100. Terminal) and a plurality of (in this example, 12) output ports (output terminals) capable of outputting an external terminal board signal to an external device (for example, hall computer) 920 of the pachinko machine 100.

  In this example, the external terminal plate 349 is a substrate that relays a signal to the external device 920, but controls transmission (output) of the signal to the external device by receiving (input) of the external terminal plate signal. It may be a control means. The input port (input terminal) and output port (output terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 may be input / output ports (input / output terminals).

  The pachinko machine 100 can output 12 types of external terminal board signals assigned with numbers 1 to 12 through the external terminal board 349. For example, the external terminal board signal 1 is a signal output by the payout control unit 600, and is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 when the payout of 10 game balls is detected at the time of a winning ball. And output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 toward the external device 920. The external terminal board signal 2 is a signal output by the dispensing control unit 600, and is input to an input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 when the opening of the inner frame or the front frame door 106 is detected. And output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 toward the external device 920.

  On the other hand, the external terminal plate signals 3 to 11 are signals output by the main control unit 300, and are input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 when the output condition shown in FIG. The output is output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 toward the external device 920. For example, the external terminal board signal 3 is output when the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped, and the external terminal board signal 4 is output when the big hit by the big hit symbol is being performed. The external terminal number 10 is a security information signal, and is output when the power is turned on or when an illegal act is detected (for example, when the main control unit 300 receives a magnetic detection signal from the wide range magnetic sensor 700). Other external terminal board signals are as shown in the figure.

  The external terminal board signal 12 is a signal that the main controller 300 outputs as necessary. When a condition other than the above (other conditions) is satisfied, information other than the above is input to the external terminal board 349. It is input to the port (input terminal) and output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal plate 349 to the outside. Further, the external terminal board signal 12 may be the same signal (with the same output conditions) as any of the external terminal numbers 3 to 11.

  FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a signal flow of the first relay board 702 and the second relay board 704 (see FIG. 23) of the present embodiment. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the signal flow of the second relay board 704, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the signal flow of the first relay board 702.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the second relay board 704 includes a connector 716 and a connector 718. The connector 718 has terminals 1 to 5, and the terminals 1 to 5 are connected to the power supply terminal VDD, the first input terminal IN 1, the second input terminal IN 2, the output terminal OUT, and the ground terminal GND of the wide range magnetic sensor 700, respectively. To do. Terminals 1 and 3 are connected to the power supply device. The terminal 3 is a terminal for switching the detection mode of the wide range magnetic sensor 700. In the present embodiment, since the mode is fixed, an H or L signal may be input. Specifically, it is connected to the power supply device (H) and fixed to one mode. In addition, when fixing to the other mode, it connects to GND (L). A terminal 2 is an input power supply terminal, which outputs a magnetic operation stop signal (also referred to as an initialization signal or an initialization operation signal) to the wide range magnetic sensor 700, and initializes, initializes and restarts the wide range magnetic sensor 700. Stop. A magnetic detection signal is input to the terminal 4 when the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 detects magnetism. Terminal 5 is grounded. The magnetic detection signal is a signal output from the wide range magnetic sensor 700, and as a signal received by the main control unit 300, the magnetic detection signal can also be referred to as a magnetic detection switch signal. The signal received by unit 300 is also referred to as a magnetic detection signal.

  The connector 716 has terminals n1 to n3, and the terminals n1 to n3 are connected to terminals N1 to N3 of the connector 714 of the first relay board 702 shown in FIG. The terminal n1 is a terminal that outputs the magnetic detection signal (the magnetic detection switch signal received by the main control unit 300) input from the wide range magnetic sensor 700 to the terminal 4 of the connector 718 to the first relay board 702, and the terminal n2 , A terminal for outputting an H level signal (magnetic operation stop confirmation signal) transmitted through the signal line L2 when the power is turned on to the first relay board 702, and the terminal n3 is transmitted from the first relay board 702. A terminal to which a magnetic operation stop signal is input.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the first relay board 702 includes a connector 712 and a connector 714. Terminals N1 to N3 of the connector 714 are connected to terminals n1 to n3 of the connector 716 of the second relay board 704, respectively. The connector 712 is a connector connected to the main control unit 300 and has terminals Na, Nb, Nc, and Ne. The terminal Na is a terminal that outputs a magnetic detection signal input to the terminal N1 of the connector 714 to the main control unit 300, and the terminal Nb is a magnetic operation stop confirmation signal input to the terminal N2 of the connector 714. The terminal Nc is a terminal to which a magnetic operation stop signal transmitted from the main control unit 300 is input. The terminal Ne is a terminal to which a switch operation confirmation signal output when the IC 726 having the disconnection monitoring circuit 706 (see FIG. 23A) detects an abnormality such as a disconnection or a short circuit is input. A terminal for outputting an operation confirmation signal to the main control unit 300.

  Terminal N1 of connector 714 is connected to IC 726 having a disconnection monitoring circuit via signal line L4, terminal N2 of connector 714 is connected to IC 726 via signal line L5, and terminal N3 of connector 714 is connected to signal line L10 and The terminal Nc of the connector 712 is connected via the switch 730. The IC 726 is connected to the terminal Na of the connector 712 of the first relay board 702 via the signal line L7, is connected to the terminal Nb of the connector 712 via the signal line L8, and is connected to the terminal Ne of the connector 712 via the signal line L9. Connect with. The signal line L7 is connected to a power source (DC5V) via the signal line L6, and the LED 728 is connected in series therebetween. The signal lines L4 and L5 are connected to a power source (DC12V) via a pull-up resistor.

  Next, the signal flow of the first relay board 702 and the second relay board 704 will be described.

  <When power is turned on (when the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is initialized)>

  Referring to FIG. 5A, in the second relay board 704, when the power (DC 12V) is turned on (during the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700), an H level signal is connected to the terminal via the signal line L1. 1 and terminal 3. Further, an H level signal is output from the terminal 2 via the signal line L2 (that is, a magnetic operation stop signal is output to the wide range magnetic sensor 700). Further, an H level signal is output from the terminal n2 of the connector 716 via the signal line L3 (that is, a magnetic operation stop confirmation signal (sometimes referred to as an initialization FB signal) is output from the terminal n2 of the connector 716. ).

  Referring to FIG. 5B, in the first relay board 702, the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal output from the second relay board 704 is input to the terminal N2, and the main control is performed from the terminal Nb via the IC 726. A magnetic operation stop confirmation signal is output to the unit 300.

  <When a magnetic operation stop signal is input from the main controller 300>

  When the main control unit 300 outputs a magnetic operation stop signal, for example, when the front frame door 106 is closed after being opened, the magnetic operation stop signal is applied to the terminal Nc of the connector 712 shown in FIG. Is entered. As a result, the switch 730 is turned on, and a magnetic operation stop signal is output from the terminal N3 of the connector 714 via the signal line L10. The magnetic operation stop signal output from the first relay board 702 is input to the terminal n3 of the second relay board 704 as shown in FIG. 5A, and the terminal of the connector 718 via the signal line L11 and the signal line L2. 2 to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700. When the magnetic operation stop signal is not input from the main control unit 300, the switch 730 connected to the signal line L10 of the first relay board 702 is turned off.

  Thus, the magnetic operation stop signal in the second relay substrate 704 is output to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 via the power source (DC 12 V) and the signal line L2 when the power is turned on, but after the power is turned on (from the main control unit 300) In the case of transmission), it is output to the wide range magnetic sensor 700 via the terminal n3, the signal line L11, and the signal line L2.

  In the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 when the power is turned on in this example, the initialization is performed when the power of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is turned on regardless of the input of the magnetic operation stop signal from the main control unit 300. The initialization operation at the time of power-on is started only when a magnetic operation stop signal is input from the main control unit 300. Good. In addition, although the circuit configuration is such that the magnetic operation stop signal is input when the power is turned on, the circuit configuration may be such that the magnetic operation stop signal is not input when the power is turned on.

  <At magnetic detection>

  When the wide range magnetic sensor 700 detects magnetism and a magnetic detection signal is output, the magnetic detection signal is input to the terminal 4 of the second relay substrate 704 shown in FIG. The magnetic detection signal is output from the terminal n1 of the connector 716 via the signal line L12.

  Referring to FIG. 5B, in the first relay board 702, the magnetic detection signal output from the second relay board 704 is input to the terminal N1, and the main controller 300 is connected to the terminal Na through the IC 726. The magnetic detection signal is output to When a magnetic detection signal is input to the IC 726, the LED 728 connected to the signal line L6 is turned on to notify that magnetism has been detected.

  <Timing chart for a wide range magnetic sensor>

  <Example 8 of timing chart>

  FIG. 48 is an example of a timing chart when the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 executes the initialization operation a plurality of times after the power is turned on. In the figure, the voltage level (ON / OFF) of the power supply from above, the state of the signal PW_WATCH (ON / OFF) input from the power supply board to the main control unit 300, the state of the front frame door open sensor 109 (door sensor) (open) OPEN indicating the state / CLOSE indicating the closed state) and a magnetic operation stop signal (also referred to as an initialization operation signal or initialization signal) output to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 (on (output) / off (non-output)) 4 shows a timing chart of a magnetic detection signal input state (on (input) / off (non-input)), magnetic detection possibility state, and initialization operation state of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 in the main control unit 300. . Further, (IN) attached to each label of PW_WATCH, door sensor, and magnetic detection signal means that these signals are signals input to the main control unit 300, and attached to the label of the magnetic operation stop signal ( OUT) indicates that this signal is a signal output from the main control unit 300 to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 or a signal output to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 when the power is turned on.

  First, the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off at timing 0, and when the power is turned on at timing t1, the voltage starts to gradually increase. As the power is turned on, the magnetic operation stop signal changes from off to on. When the voltage supply (voltage increase) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 50%) at the timing t2, the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 is turned on. At this timing, the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 executes an initialization operation (initialization process) when the power is turned on.

  Further, since the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is executed from the timing t2, the magnetic detection is disabled, and the main control unit 300 from the timing t2 to the timing t5 (the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor is completed). Until the magnetic detection signal is not input, the magnetic detection is disabled.

  When the voltage supply (voltage rise) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 70%) at timing t3, the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-on state. As a result, PW_WATCH is turned on (H level).

  At timing t4, the user program of the main control unit 300 (that is, main control main process) starts executing. At this timing, the magnetic operation stop signal is turned off (the magnetic operation stop signal is not output).

  At timing t5, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 completes the initialization operation when the power is turned on, and at this timing, the main control unit 300 can input a magnetic detection signal (becomes a state capable of magnetic detection). A period T from timing t4 to timing t5 is a period in which the magnetic field is continuously measured (steady magnetic field measurement time), and the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 calculates the value of the magnetic field acquired in the period T. Set the threshold.

  Note that the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 initializes the sensitivity offset of the sensor (a process for reducing the magnetic field to zero) and determines the failure of the sensor itself in the initialization operation when the power is turned on.

  From timing t6, the main control unit 300 starts to determine whether the door is open, and the OPEN / CLOSE unquestion period ends. The period from the timing t2 to the timing t5 is a period in which the initialization operation at the time of turning on the power is executed. However, since the main controller 300 cannot determine the door opening state, the front frame door opening sensor Regardless of the signal 109 (door status signal), a period during which other processing (for example, initialization operation (initialization processing) of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700) can be executed (OPEN / CLOSE of the front frame door opening sensor 109). Unquestioned period). That is, during the period from timing 0 to timing t6, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 performs the initialization operation during the period from timing t2 to t5, regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106, and the main control unit 300 performs magnetic detection. Is impossible. In this example, the door sensor is off (front frame door 106 is closed) at timing t6. Note that the initialization operation at the time of power-on may be started from timing 0 or timing t1, or the initialization operation may end at timing t6.

  Note that the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 may be configured so that it cannot be initialized when a strong magnet is brought closer. Further, the main control unit 300 may not be able to detect that the initialization operation has been completed, and the main control unit 300 may be able to detect that the initialization operation has been completed.

  On the other hand, after the timing t7, it is a period during which the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 can be executed depending on the open / closed state of the front frame door 106. In this example, when the front frame door 106 is opened (the door sensor is OPEN) at timing t7, a signal (door open signal) of the front frame door open sensor 109 is input to the main control unit 300. As a result, the main controller 300 outputs a magnetic operation stop signal, and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stops the magnetic detection operation. As a result, the main control unit 300 enters a state where magnetic detection is not possible.

  When the front frame door 106 is closed at the timing t8 (the door sensor is CLOSE), the magnetic operation stop signal input from the main control unit 300 to the first input terminal IN1 of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is turned off, and at this timing, The wide range magnetic sensor 700 starts the initialization operation again.

  When the initialization operation of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is completed at the timing t9, the magnetic detection operation of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 can be executed. Here, the period T from the timing t8 to the timing t9 is the stationary magnetic field measurement time like the period T from the timing t4 to the time t5. In this example, the period from timing t2 to timing t5 is a period during which the initialization operation (first initialization operation) of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is performed when the power is turned on. This is a period in which the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is restarted (the initialization operation for the second and subsequent times is executed) depending on the open / close state of the frame door 106 and the like.

  The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 of this embodiment executes an initialization operation (initialization process) associated with power-on of the pachinko machine 100 from timing t2 to t5 during the initialization operation period when the power is turned on. This initialization operation is executed regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106. When the power is turned on, a magnetic operation stop signal is output to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 in a period from timing t1 to t4, and the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is magnetic from timing t2 to a timing t5 when the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is completed. Detection is not possible. In addition, the main control unit 300 cannot detect magnetism until the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is completed and the limitation of the interrupt function of the main control unit timer interrupt process is released.

  On the other hand, the timing t7 is a timing at which the front frame door 106 is changed from the closed state to the opened state, and the timing t7 to the timing t8 is a period in which the front frame door 106 is in the opened state. During this period, the main control unit 300 continues to output the magnetic operation stop signal, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 stops the magnetic detection operation, and the main control unit 300 cannot perform magnetic detection. Further, at timing t8, when the main control unit 300 turns off (non-output) the magnetic operation stop signal based on the closing of the front frame door 106, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 restarts the initialization operation. Further, during the period from the time when the wide range magnetic sensor 700 resumes the initialization operation to the time when the initialization operation is completed (period from timing t8 to t9), the magnetic detection in the main control unit 300 is disabled. Then, after completion of the re-started initialization operation (after timing t9), the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 can execute the magnetic detection operation, and the main control unit 300 can also detect the magnetic field.

  As described above, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 according to the present embodiment has the power supply even when the magnetic operation stop signal is output (timing t2 to t4) or the magnetic operation stop signal is not output (timing t4 to t5). Executes the initialization operation at the time of input. Further, when the magnetic operation stop signal changes from off to on (output state) and falls from on to off (change from the output state to the non-output state), the second and subsequent initialization operations are executed.

  In this example, at timing t7, an example in which the door sensor opening detection timing coincides with the magnetic operation stop signal output timing is shown, but the door sensor signal (open / closed state of front frame door 106). Depending on the reception timing (for example, when a magnetic operation stop signal is output in the next interrupt processing after detecting OPEN of the door sensor), the timing of detecting the opening of the door sensor may be different from the output timing of the magnetic operation stop signal. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  In this example, the period from the timing t5 to the timing t6 is a period in which the main controller 300 can detect the magnetism, but the on / off of the door sensor is also an unquestioned period. That is, since the open / closed state of the front frame door 106 is unknown, during this period, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 outputs a magnetic detection signal (the magnetic detection signal is input to the main control unit 300). The input signal may be discarded (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  <Ninth Embodiment of Timing Chart>

  FIG. 49 is another example of a signal output timing chart relating to the wide-range magnetic sensor. In the figure, the voltage level (ON / OFF) of the power supply from above, the state of the signal PW_WATCH (ON / OFF) input from the power supply board to the main control unit 300, the state of the front frame door open sensor 109 (door sensor) (open) OPEN indicating the state / CLOSE indicating the closed state), reception state (reception / non-reception) of the payout command transmitted by the payout control unit 600 in the main control unit 300, and a magnetic operation stop confirmation signal (input to the main control unit 300) Input state (also referred to as initialization FB signal) (on (input) / off (non-input)), magnetic operation stop signal state (on (output) / off (non-output)), magnetic detection signal in main control unit 300 Input state (ON (input) / OFF (non-input)) and whether or not magnetic detection is possible, transmission of an error command to the first sub-control unit 400 (and / or the second sub-control unit 500) State (ON (transmission) / off (non-transmission)), the state (on / off) of the solenoid 332, the initialization operation of the state of the wide magnetic sensor 700 shows a timing chart. Further, (IN) attached to each label of PW_WATCH, door sensor, payout command, magnetic operation stop confirmation signal, and magnetic detection signal means that these signals are signals input to the main control unit 300. (OUT) attached to the label of error or solenoid means that this signal or command is a signal or command output from the main control unit 300. Further, (OUT) attached to the label of the magnetic operation stop signal indicates that it is a signal output from the main control unit 300 to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 or a signal output to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 when the power is turned on. Have

  First, the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off at timing 0, and when the power is turned on at timing t1, the voltage starts to gradually increase. As the power is turned on, the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal and the magnetic operation stop signal are changed from OFF to ON. When the voltage supply (voltage increase) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 50%) at the timing t2, the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 is turned on. At this timing, the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 executes an initialization operation (initialization process) when the power is turned on.

  Further, since the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is executed from the timing t2, the magnetic detection is disabled, and the main control unit 300 from the timing t2 to the timing t5 (the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor is completed). Until the magnetic detection signal is not input, the magnetic detection is disabled.

  When the voltage supply (voltage rise) of the power source reaches a certain rate (for example, about 70%) at timing t3, the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-on state. As a result, PW_WATCH is turned on (H level).

  At timing t4, the user program of the main control unit 300 (that is, main control main process) starts executing. At this timing, the magnetic operation stop signal is turned off (the magnetic operation stop signal is not output), and the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal input to the main control unit 300 is also turned off (the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal is not input).

  At timing t5, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 completes the initialization operation when the power is turned on, and at this timing, the main control unit 300 can input a magnetic detection signal (becomes a state capable of magnetic detection).

  A period T from timing t4 to timing t5 is a period in which the magnetic field is continuously measured (steady magnetic field measurement time), and the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 calculates the value of the magnetic field acquired in the period T. Set the threshold.

  Note that the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 initializes the sensitivity offset of the sensor (a process for reducing the magnetic field to zero) and determines the failure of the sensor itself in the initialization operation when the power is turned on.

  From timing t6, the main control unit 300 starts to determine whether the door is open, and the OPEN / CLOSE unquestion period ends. The period from the timing t2 to the timing t5 is a period in which the initialization operation at the time of turning on the power is executed. However, since the main controller 300 cannot determine the door opening state, the front frame door opening sensor Regardless of the signal 109 (door status signal), a period during which other processing (for example, initialization operation (initialization processing) of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700) can be executed (OPEN / CLOSE of the front frame door opening sensor 109). Unquestioned period). That is, during the period from timing 0 to timing t6, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 performs the initialization operation during the period from timing t2 to t5, regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106, and the main control unit 300 performs magnetic detection. Is impossible. In this example, the door sensor is off (front frame door 106 is closed) at timing t6. Note that the initialization operation at the time of power-on may be started from timing 0 or timing t1, or the initialization operation may end at timing t6.

  Note that the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 may be configured so that it cannot be initialized when a strong magnet is brought closer. Further, the main control unit 300 may not be able to detect that the initialization operation has been completed, and the main control unit 300 may be able to detect that the initialization operation has been completed.

  In this embodiment, the door state signal of the front frame door opening sensor 109 is transmitted to the main control unit 300 by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit 600, and is further paid out by the main control unit timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. Receive as a command.

  The timing at which the door state signal is transmitted from the front frame door opening sensor 109 to the dispensing control unit 600 is the timing at which the detection state of the front frame door opening sensor 109 has changed. Therefore, a door state signal (door opening signal) is transmitted to the dispensing control unit 600 when the closed front frame door 106 is opened, and a door state signal (door is opened when the opened front frame door 106 is closed. Close signal) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600, but the main control unit 300 receives the signal as a payout command in the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In addition, when the power is turned on with the door open, the door remains open even after a certain period of time (for example, the timer interrupt processing interval (100 ms) of the payout controller 600) has elapsed since the door open was detected. When the door is open, a door open signal is output.

  That is, when the main control unit main process has started in the main control unit 300 at the timing t6, the door state signal from the front frame door opening sensor 109 is input to the main control unit 300. On the other hand, when the main control unit main process is not started, the door state signal is not output. Therefore, strictly speaking, the main control unit 300 is in a state in which the state (open / closed) of the front frame door 106 is unknown until the first main control unit timer interrupt process is executed.

  At timings t6 and t7, the main control unit 300 receives a payout command output from the payout control unit 600 in the main control timer interrupt process (FIG. 44). Thereby, in this example, the main control unit 300 detects that the front frame door 106 is closed.

  Further, the main control unit 300 monitors the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal at a timing t6 at which the payout command is received (falling) and at a timing t7 at which the payout command is not received (falling). That is, the main control unit 300 monitors both the door state signal and the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal in the main control unit timer interrupt process (timing t6, 67). As described above, the main control unit 300 monitors the signal a plurality of times, thereby making it less susceptible to noise.

  Then, the main control unit 300 that detects that the front frame door 106 is in the closed state and the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal is off performs the initializing operation of the first wide range magnetic sensor 700 in the closed state of the front frame door 106. In order to execute (in order to execute the initialization operation that is the second time when the initialization operation at the time of turning on the power is included), at a timing t8 after elapse of a certain time (for example, 4 ms for one interrupt) The output of the magnetic operation stop signal to the sensor 700 is started. At this timing, the main control unit 300 starts receiving a magnetic operation stop confirmation signal. As a result, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 stops the magnetic detection operation, and the main control unit 300 enters a state where magnetic detection is not possible.

  The main control unit 300 again monitors the door state signal and the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal at the timing t9 when the next payout command is received (falling) and at the timing t10 when the payout command is not received (falling). To do.

  The main control unit 300 that detects that the front frame door 106 is in the closed state and the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal is ON turns off the magnetic operation stop signal output to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 at the timing t10. (Non-output). Thereby, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 executes the initialization operation (starts again). A period T from timing t4 to timing t5 and a period T from timing t10 to timing t11 are periods during which the magnetic field is continuously measured (steady magnetic field measurement time). Calculate the value of the magnetic field acquired at T and set the threshold.

  When the initialization operation of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is completed at the timing t11, the magnetic detection operation of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 can be executed, but the main control unit 300 receives the next payout command (falling) timing t14. Until, even if a magnetic detection signal is input, it is discarded. In addition, after timing t11, the main controller 300 may be able to detect the magnetism. The main control unit 300 again monitors the door state signal and the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal at timing t14 and timing t15 when the payout command is not received (falling).

  When the front frame door 106 is in the closed state and the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal is OFF, the magnetic detection signal output from the wide range magnetic sensor 700 can be read.

  At timing t10, for example, when the solenoid 332 is operating, the main control unit 300 stops outputting the initialization signal. In addition, a period (period from timing t10 to t13) including a period during execution of the (second) initialization operation after completion of the initialization operation at power-on is a period during which the operation of the solenoid 332 is prohibited. is there. Therefore, for example, when the solenoid 332 starts operation during this period due to power interruption and power recovery during a big hit, the initialization operation being performed is stopped, and the door state signal and the magnetic operation stop by the main control unit 300 are stopped again. Processing starts from monitoring of the confirmation signal (here, after timing t6).

  As described above, the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 according to the present embodiment has the power supply even when the magnetic operation stop signal is output (timing t2 to t4) or the magnetic operation stop signal is not output (timing t4 to t5). Executes the initialization operation at the time of input. Further, when the magnetic operation stop signal changes from off to on (output state) and falls from on to off (change from the output state to the non-output state), the second and subsequent initialization operations are executed.

  When the power is turned on, a magnetic operation stop signal is output to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 in a period from timing t1 to t4, and the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is magnetic from timing t2 to a timing t5 when the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is completed. Detection is not possible. In addition, the main control unit 300 cannot detect magnetism until the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is completed and the limitation of the interrupt function of the main control unit timer interrupt process is released.

  Further, the main control unit 300 that detects that the front frame door 106 is in the closed state and the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal is OFF after the initialization operation period when the power is turned on is closed. The initialization operation of the first wide-range magnetic sensor 700 in the state is executed (when the initialization operation at the time of turning on the power is included, the initialization operation which is the second time is executed). Prior to execution of the initialization operation, during a period from timing t8 to timing t10, the main control unit 300 outputs a magnetic operation stop signal to the wide range magnetic sensor 700, and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 stops the magnetic detection operation. Magnetic detection in the main control unit 300 becomes impossible. Then, at timing t10, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 starts the initialization operation again. When the initialization operation is completed at timing t11, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 can detect the magnetic field.

  In this example, during the period from the timing t5 to the timing t8, as in the eighth embodiment, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 outputs a magnetic detection signal (the magnetic detection signal is input to the main control unit 300). The signal input in the control unit 300 may be discarded. Further, in this example, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 outputs a magnetic detection signal (the magnetic detection signal is input to the main control unit 300) during the period from the timing t11 to the timing t15 when the payout command falls. The signal input in the unit 300 may be discarded.

  <Embodiment 10 of timing chart>

  FIG. 50 is another example of a timing chart of signal output related to a wide range magnetic sensor. In the figure, the voltage level (ON / OFF) of the power supply from above, the state of the signal PW_WATCH (ON / OFF) input from the power supply board to the main control unit 300, and the input state (ON) of the magnetic detection signal in the main control unit 300 (Input) / off (non-input)), output state of external output signal (security information signal) (on (output) / off (non-output)), output state of magnetic detection signal of wide range magnetic sensor 700 (on (output) ) / OFF (non-output)), and a magnetic detection state (detection / non-detection) of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is shown. Further, (IN) attached to each label of PW_WATCH and the magnetic detection signal means that these signals are signals input to the main controller 300, and (OUT) attached to the label of the external output signal is This indicates that this signal is a signal output from the main control unit 300 to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 or a signal output to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 when the power is turned on.

  First, since the timing 0 to the timing t3 are the same as the operations during the synchronization in the eighth embodiment or the ninth embodiment, the description is omitted. When the wide range magnetic sensor 700 detects the magnetism at the timing ta1 at which the magnetic detection is possible (after completing the initialization operation), the wide range magnetic sensor 700 at the timing ta2 after a predetermined time (T2) has passed since the detection. A magnetic detection signal is output to the main control unit 300.

  In the main control unit 300, the magnetic detection is performed at a timing ta3 after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4 ms which is the maximum time required for one interrupt) after the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 outputs the magnetic detection signal to the main control unit 300. Receive a signal.

  In this example, when the main control unit 300 detects (receives) a magnetic detection signal, the main control unit 300 outputs an external output signal (security information signal) to the external device 920. The external output signal is, for example, a signal including information on a magnetic detection error.

  When the magnetic detection of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is turned off (non-detection state) at timing ta4, the magnetic detection signal is not output at timing ta5 after a predetermined time (T2) has elapsed since the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 has entered the non-detection state. Output. In the main control unit 300, the magnetic detection signal is output at timing ta <b> 6 after a predetermined time (for example, 4 ms, which is the maximum time required for one interrupt) has elapsed since the magnetic sensor 700 did not output the magnetic detection signal to the main control unit 300. Detects no output. In this example, the output of the external output signal is stopped at timing ta7 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the magnetic detection signal was not output.

  As described above, according to the specifications on the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 side, from the detection of magnetism (timing ta1) until the output of the magnetism detection signal to the main control unit 300 (or from the non-detection of magnetism (timing ta4), The response time T2 may occur until the output to the control unit 300 is stopped).

  In this example, even if magnetism is detected, the gaming operation is not stopped, and when the main control unit 300 receives the magnetism detection signal, an external output signal (security information signal) is output to the external device 920. The external output signal is output for a predetermined time T1 (for example, 30 seconds) from the output start (timing ta3), and the output is continued even if the magnetic detection signal is not detected during that time.

  In this example, the case where the magnetic detection signal is turned off before the elapse of the output period (T1) of the external output signal is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the elapse of the output period (T1) of the external output signal. In some cases, the magnetic detection signal is turned off later, or the magnetic detection signal is turned off at the same time as the output period (T1) of the external output signal (timing ta7).

  In this example, the magnetic detection signal and the external output signal are turned on at the same timing (timing t3) (for example, turned on in the same interrupt processing). The external output signal may be turned on by another interrupt process.

  The period after the timing ta1 shown in the figure may be, for example, the period after the timing t7 in FIG. 48 and / or the period after the timing t8 shown in FIG. For example, in the period after timing t8 shown in FIG. 49, when the main control unit 300 detects that the front frame door 106 is closed, the main control unit 300 outputs a magnetic operation stop signal again (FIG. 49). Timing t8). When the magnetic operation stop signal is turned from on to off (non-output), the initialization operation of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is executed again. When the magnetic detection signal can be read after completion of the initialization operation (after timing t15 in FIG. 49), when the wide range magnetic sensor 700 detects magnetism and the main control unit 300 detects the magnetic detection signal. An external output signal is output to the outside (FIG. 50).

  The main control unit 300 may output a magnetic operation stop signal each time it detects that the front frame door 106 is closed.

  According to such a configuration, when the front frame door 106 is in the closed state (when the front frame door 106 is changed from the open state to the closed state), the magnetic operation stop signal for causing the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 to execute the initialization operation is output again. (Timing t7 in FIG. 48, timing t8 in FIG. 49), it may be easy to prevent erroneous detection of magnetism and stable control may be performed.

  In addition, by preventing the output of a magnetic detection signal due to erroneous detection, accurate information (security information signal) regarding magnetic detection may be output to the external device 920 in some cases.

  In addition, since the front frame door 106 is closed in the state where the game is performed, the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is performed in a state where the front frame door 106 is closed. Processing may be possible.

  When the front frame door 106 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the output of the magnetic operation stop signal is stopped (timing t13 in FIG. 25) and then the front frame door 106 is closed. In addition, since the magnetic operation stop signal is output again (timing t8 in FIG. 49), stable control may be performed.

  <Example 11 of timing chart>

  FIG. 51 is another example showing a timing chart of signal output related to a wide range magnetic sensor, and shows an example of a timing chart when power interruption and power recovery occur.

  Each label in the timing chart is obtained by adding the state of the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 to the bottom column of the embodiment 10 in FIG. Further, the operation during the period from the timing 0 to the timing t3 is the same as the operation during the synchronization in the above-described eighth embodiment, so that the description thereof is omitted.

  First, the wide range magnetic sensor 700 detects magnetism at the timing tb1, and the wide range magnetic sensor 700 outputs a magnetic detection signal to the main control unit 300 at the timing tb2. The main control unit detects (receives) the magnetic detection signal at timing tb3 and starts outputting an external output signal (security information signal) to the external device 920 at the same timing.

  For example, when the magnetic detection signal is received and the operation (game operation) of the main control unit 300 is configured to stop, the external output signal is turned off by the main control unit 300 at the timing tb4. The output continues until. At the timing tb4 when the main control unit 300 is in a power interruption state, the magnetic detection signal is also turned off. At timing tb5, the power supply of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is turned off. At this timing, the output of the magnetic detection signal of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is also turned off, and the magnetic detection state of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is also in the non-detection state.

  When the power is turned on again (recovered) at timing tb6, the magnetic operation stop signal due to the power on is gradually shifted from the off state to the on state. At timing tb7, the power of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is turned on, and the initialization operation is executed. Further, the main control unit 300 enters a state in which magnetism cannot be detected from timing tb7.

  At timing tb9, the user program starts executing in the main control unit 300 (that is, main control unit main processing is started), and the output of the magnetic operation stop signal is turned off. At timing tb10, an external output signal is output. When the initialization operation of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is completed at timing tb11, the magnetic detection is possible.

  In this example, when an external output signal (for example, a security information signal including information such as a magnetic detection error) is output, the output continues until a power interruption occurs (timing tb3 to tb4). The external output signal is cleared when power is restored after a power interruption, and after a predetermined time from power-on at timing tb10 (for example, after the elapse of 4 ms from power-on or the end of the wait timer for rising of the peripheral board) After), it is output again. The external output signal in this case may be turned off (non-output) after being output for a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) as indicated by timing tb11 to timing tb12.

  The external output signal may be output even when the initialization operation of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 is being executed (timing tb10), or may not be output.

  The period after the timing tb1 shown in the figure may be, for example, the period after the timing t7 in FIG. 48 and / or the period after the timing t8 shown in FIG.

  <Example of magnetic detection error notification>

  With reference to FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, the notification example of the magnetic detection error of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a notification example when notifying that a magnetic detection error has occurred during a game. The figure (a) is the front view which extracts and shows the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 and the special figure 1 display apparatus 212, the special figure 2 display apparatus 212, and the common figure display apparatus 210 part, (b) is the figure. FIG. 2 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 3C is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100. Moreover, the left figure of each figure is a figure which shows a normal state, and the right figure is a figure which shows the state which alert | reported the magnetic detection error.

  The description of “main: magnetic detection OFF” in the following drawings indicates that there is no abnormal magnetic detection signal input from the wide range magnetic sensor 700 to the main control unit 300 (the main control unit 300 has not detected magnetism). "Main: Magnetic detection ON" indicates that there is an abnormal magnetic detection signal (the main control unit 300 detects magnetic detection).

  The left figure of Fig.52 (a) is the timing in the time of symbol fluctuation, for example. At this timing, no abnormal magnetism is detected in the main control unit 300. The right figure of FIG. 6A shows a state in which the player has started an illegal act of bringing a magnet close to the front frame door 106, for example, and the main control unit 300 detects magnetism (that is, a magnetic detection error). When an occurrence is detected), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, the front surface of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) notifies that the magnetism has been detected (in this example, “a magnet has been detected”). Display).

  When a magnetic detection error occurs, all of the seven segments of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 212, and the general figure display device 210, and the special figure 1 hold display device lamp (LED), Special figure 2 hold display device lamp (LED), universal figure hold display device lamp (LED), not shown "game state (for example, operation state of probability variation function, operation state of variation time reduction function, (electric The lamps (LEDs) that respectively display the operation state of the open extension function) and the “lamps (LEDs) that display how to strike (for example, right-handed)” are all turned off. Note that all of the seven segments of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 212, and the universal figure display device 210 may be lit, or in the lit state immediately before the magnetic detection error occurs. There may be. All of the seven segments of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 212, and the universal figure display device 210, the lamp (LED) of the special figure 1 hold display device, and the special figure 2 hold display device Lamp (LED), lamp of general-purpose hold display device (LED), “not-shown game state (for example, operation state of probability variation function, operation state of variation time shortening function, operation of open extension function (of electric Chu)) One or a plurality of devices (lamps (LEDs)) indicating “how to place (for example, right-handed)” or “devices (lamps)” are turned off. One or a plurality of devices (lamps (LEDs)) may be kept on.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C (in conjunction with the notification in FIG. 2A), for example, a lamp (LED) 922 provided on the front frame door 106 or a game board 200 is provided. The light emission pattern (light emission mode) of the effect movable body 924 including the LED that has been changed may be changed. That is, as shown in the left diagrams of FIGS. 7B and 7C, during normal game, the lamp 922 and the effect movable body 924 emit light with a normal effect light emission pattern (for example, white, blue), etc. When a detection error occurs, the lamp 922 and the effect movable body 924 emit light with an error notification light emission pattern (for example, red lighting or flashing), as shown in the right diagrams of FIGS. Notifies the occurrence of a magnetic detection error. That is, when a magnetic detection error occurs, the error notification light emission pattern is executed with priority over other light emission patterns. When a magnetic detection error occurs, the LED 728 provided on the first relay board 702 housed in the main board case 158 is turned on.

  Even if the main control unit 300 is outputting a magnetic operation stop signal to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700, the sub control unit (second sub control unit 500) performs the lamp (LED) 922 or the rendering operation of the rendering movable body 924. This control may be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when magnetism is detected, the effect movable body 924 (or the LED 922) is changed from the first state to the second state, so that the store clerk can easily notice the occurrence of the abnormality, It may be possible to warn those who are cheating.

  In addition, when the front frame door 106 is in the closed state (or when the open state is changed to the closed state), the main control unit 300 again outputs a magnetic operation stop signal for causing the wide range magnetic sensor 700 to execute the initialization operation. Therefore, it may be easy to prevent erroneous detection of magnetism and stable control may be performed.

  In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent notification due to erroneous detection of magnetism and to make it easier for the store clerk to grasp accurate information.

  In addition, notification by the effect movable body 924 (or LED 922) due to erroneous detection of magnetism may be prevented, and the store clerk may be able to easily grasp accurate information.

  In addition, since the light emission state of the effect movable body 924 (or the LED 922) changes when the magnetic detection is made, it is easy for the store clerk to notice the occurrence of an abnormality, and warns a person who is cheating. There are cases where it is possible.

  Even if the main control unit 300 is outputting a magnetic operation stop signal to the wide-range magnetic sensor 700, the sub control unit (second sub control unit 500) performs the lamp (LED) 922 or the rendering operation of the rendering movable body 924. In some cases, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not a magnetic operation stop signal has been output, and fraud can be prevented.

  Even if the front frame door 106 is being opened, the lamp (LED) 922 and the production operation of the production movable body 924 are continued to produce the production even if the front frame door 106 is opened by a store clerk. You may be able to enjoy the operation.

  On the other hand, while the front frame door 106 is open, the rendering operation of the lamp (LED) 922 or the rendering movable body 924 may be stopped, and the clerk may be able to concentrate and eliminate the error.

  Even if the front frame door 106 is open, the main control unit 300 may output a magnetic operation stop signal, so that the magnetic field can be stabilized and the detection operation can be stabilized. There are cases where you can.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing another notification example of the magnetic detection error. (A), (c) is a front view in which the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 212, and the common figure display device 210 are extracted and shown. b) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 4D is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100. Moreover, the left figure of each figure is a figure which shows a normal state, and the middle figure and the right figure are figures which show the state which alert | reported the magnetic detection error.

  The state shown in the left diagrams of FIGS. 13A and 13B is, for example, the timing when the effect of super reach shown in FIG. 33L described above is started, and the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is white. The display is changed to a white color (white background), and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a small size (decreasing display of the decorative symbol), for example, in the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Even when there is a hold, the hold icon display area 900, the change icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the change icon CI are hidden (erased). Further, the effect movable body (including the LED) 924 provided on the game board 200 and the lamp 922 provided on the front frame door 106 perform a normal effect. That is, the effect movable body 924 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 of the game board 200 starts to descend so as to cover the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 while emitting light with a light emission pattern of a normal effect. The lamp 922 also emits light in a normal production light emission pattern.

  When the main control unit 300 detects the occurrence of magnetism (the occurrence of a magnetism detection error) at the timing shown in the middle diagrams (a) and (b) of FIG. A display for notifying that magnetism has been detected is performed on the display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, the light emitting mode of the effect movable body 924 and the lamp 922 changes to a light emission pattern for error notification. And as shown to the right figure of the same figure (a) and (b), the production | presentation movable body 924 continues the operation | movement, even if a magnetism detection error generate | occur | produces, for example to the position which covers the front of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 Descend. In addition, at the timings shown in the right diagrams of FIGS. 4A and 4B, the magnetic detection error notification is being continued, but the decorative symbol display device 208 has a hold icon display area 900, a variable icon display area 800, a hold icon. PI and change icon CI are redisplayed. Further, in this example, a magnetic detection error notification (here, “let's detect a magnet”) in the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon display area 900, a change icon display area 800, a hold icon PI, a change icon At least a part of the CI is covered by the effect movable body 924 that continues to operate. In the above state, the decorative symbol display device 208 may not display the hold icon display area 900, the change icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the change icon CI again.

  When the notification of the magnetic detection error is executed, a display dedicated to the magnetic detection error is displayed on the full screen as shown in FIG. 38 (e), and other displays (for example, a decorative symbol change display and a hold icon display area) are displayed. 900, change icon display area 800, hold icon PI, change icon CI, and other effects display) may not be displayed. Further, a magnetic error display may be displayed and various effect displays may be continued as they are. Here, if the magnetic detection error is an error that stops the game operation, a display dedicated to magnetic error detection as shown in FIG. 38 may be displayed until the error is canceled, or the magnetic error is displayed until the error is canceled. While the display is displayed, various effects (decorative symbol change display, reach effect display, etc.) may continue until the shake change display state (the game operation is stopped and the symbol stop command is the first sub-control Since it cannot be transmitted to the part, the display will continue to display the fluctuation fluctuation until it is canceled). When the condition for canceling the error is power off, if the power is turned off during the fluctuation of the symbol and the power is restored without resetting the RAM (restarting is started), the decorative symbol display device 208 finishes the fluctuation of the symbol. Until that time, you may be allowed to display a display dedicated to power recovery (for example, “Preparing”, “Recovering”, etc.) without displaying the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, The effect display may be resumed from the state.

  If the main control unit 300 is configured to stop the game operation when a magnetic detection error occurs, the effect movable body 924 has an operation position (for example, FIG. , (B) middle view or right view) may be returned to the initial position when the power is turned on. Further, when the sub control unit (for example, the second sub control unit 500) is configured to return the effect movable body 924 to the initial position, the operation position is returned to the initial position when a magnetic detection error occurs. May be.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3C and 3D, only the light emission patterns of the effect movable body 924 and the lamp 922 may be changed. The states shown in the left diagrams of FIGS. 7C and 7D are, for example, the timing at which the effect of super reach shown in FIG. 33L described above is started, and the effect movable body provided in the game board 200 The lamp 922 provided on the front frame door 106 and the front frame door 924 performs a normal effect.

  When the main control unit 300 detects the occurrence of magnetism (the occurrence of a magnetic detection error) at the timing shown in the middle diagrams (c) and (d) of FIG. In the display areas 208a to 208c, a display for notifying that magnetism has been detected (in this example, a display indicating “magnet was detected”) is performed, and the effect movable body 924 and the lamp 922 have an error in light emission mode. It changes to the light emission pattern for information.

  In addition, at the timings shown in the right diagrams of FIGS. 4C and 4D, the magnetic detection error is being notified, but the decorative symbol display device 208 has a hold icon display area 900, a variable icon display area 800, a hold icon. PI and change icon CI are redisplayed.

  When notifying a magnetic notification error by changing the light emission mode of the effect movable body 924 and the lamp 922, the light emission pattern and the light emission color are not limited. For example, in the case where the effect movable body 924 and the lamp 922 are configured by a rotating warning light in which a reflecting mirror rotates around the light emitter, a predetermined time elapses as the rotation time of the reflecting mirror for the normal effect. The reflecting mirror may be rotated until it is rotated, or when the magnetic detection error occurs, the reflecting mirror may be forcibly stopped. Further, when the lamp 922 is constituted by a rotary warning lamp in which a reflecting mirror rotates around the light emitter, this can also be referred to as effect moving means.

  If the main control unit 300 is configured to stop the game operation when a magnetic detection error occurs, the effect movable body 924 has an operation position (for example, FIG. , (B) middle view or right view) may be returned to the initial position when the power is turned on. Further, when the sub control unit (for example, the second sub control unit 500) is configured to return the effect movable body 924 to the initial position, the operation position is returned to the initial position when a magnetic detection error occurs. May be.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a control unit (for example, main control unit 300) and a detection unit (for example, wide range magnetic sensor 700). The detection means is a means capable of detecting magnetism, and the detection means is a means capable of outputting a signal relating to the detection of the magnetism (hereinafter referred to as “magnetic detection signal”), and When the second condition (for example, when it is determined that the door body is changed from the open state to the closed state) is established, the control means receives the first signal (for example, the initialization operation signal (magnetic operation stop). Signal)), and when the control means determines that the magnetism has been detected, the control means outputs a signal (hereinafter referred to as “second signal (eg, security)” to the outside (eg, an external device). Information signal) " Cormorant.) A means for performing a control related to it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the control means. Further, for example, by outputting the second signal to an external device (such as a hall computer), accurate information regarding magnetic detection may be output to the external device. In addition, it may be easy to prevent erroneous detection of magnetism and stable control may be performed.

  The control means may be means for outputting the first signal every time the second condition is satisfied.

  The first signal is a signal related to the initialization operation of the detecting means (hereinafter referred to as “initialization operation signal”), and the second signal is a security information signal. The detecting means is means for starting the initialization operation on condition that the initialization operation signal is changed from an input state to a non-input state, and the detection means is the second condition. The means for starting the initialization operation when another first condition (e.g., power-on) is established, and the detection means performs the magnetism after the initialization operation is executed. The detection means is configured to detect the magnetic value detected by the detection means (hereinafter referred to as “second value”) (hereinafter referred to as “second value”). Than the first value (for example, threshold)) If already there may be a means for outputting the magnetic detection signal.

  According to such a configuration, the control unit outputs a signal for causing the detection unit to execute the initialization operation when the first condition is satisfied, and outputs the signal to the detection unit when the second condition is satisfied. Since the signal for executing the initialization operation is output again, it may be easy to prevent erroneous detection of magnetism and stable control may be performed.

  The detecting means executes the initialization operation on the condition that the initialization operation signal is changed from the input state to the non-input state based on the establishment of the first condition, and when the second condition is satisfied. Since the initialization operation is executed again, there are cases where it is easy to prevent erroneous detection of magnetism and stable control can be performed.

  Note that, when a condition different from the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the detection means may output a magnetic detection signal for a certain time (for example, for 250 ms).

  Further, the requirement that the first condition is satisfied may be a requirement that includes turning on the power.

  Further, the requirement that the first condition is satisfied may be a requirement that the control unit outputs the initialization operation signal.

  Further, the requirement that the first condition is satisfied may be a requirement that the power is turned on and that the control unit outputs the initialization operation signal.

  The initialization operation signal may be a magnetic operation stop signal, and the detection unit may stop detecting the magnetism when the magnetic operation stop signal is input. . The detecting means may be a means capable of outputting the magnetic detection signal to the control means after the initialization operation is completed.

  According to such a configuration, output of a magnetic detection signal due to erroneous detection can be prevented, so that accurate information regarding magnetic detection may be output to the outside.

  The detection means may be means for outputting the magnetic detection signal when the second value is the same value as the first value.

  A door body (for example, front frame door 106, inner frame (main body 104), front frame door 106 and inner frame front frame door 106), second detection means (for example, front frame door opening sensor 109); The detection means is a first detection means, and the second detection means outputs a door opening signal to the control means when the door body is changed from a closed state to an open state. The control means is means for determining that the door body is in the closed state when the door open signal is changed from an input state to a non-input state, and the second condition is satisfied. The requirement to be included may include a requirement that the control means determine that the door body has changed from the open state to the closed state.

  According to such a configuration, in the state where the game is performed, since the door is closed, the initialization is performed in the state where the door is closed, so that processing is performed in a state close to the game. May be possible.

  The control means may be a means for executing control for outputting the second signal when power is turned on.

  Note that the time for outputting the second signal may be finite (for example, 30 seconds), or the time for outputting the second signal is infinite (for example, until the power is turned off or the error is canceled). ). Even if the time for outputting the second signal is set to be finite (for example, 30 seconds), the counter update process can be executed within the main control unit timer interrupt process. When the counter update process is skipped, the counter does not decrease, so the time for outputting the second signal may be infinite (for example, output until the power is turned off or the error is cleared). .

  Further, the detection means is means for starting output of the magnetic detection signal on condition that the magnetism has changed from a non-detection state to a detection state, and the detection means detects the magnetism from the detection state to the detection state. It may be a means for terminating the output of the magnetic detection signal on condition that the state has changed to the non-detection state.

  Further, the control means that is outputting the first signal, when the third condition (for example, it is determined that the door body has changed from the closed state to the open state) is satisfied, The control means for stopping the output of the first signal is a means for outputting the first signal again when the second condition is satisfied. There may be.

  According to such a configuration, if the third condition is satisfied, the output of the first signal is stopped, and if the condition is satisfied after the stop, the first signal is output again, so that stable control is performed. There are cases where it is possible.

  In addition, the control means is referred to as a signal to be output to the outside (hereinafter referred to as a “third signal (for example, a jackpot signal)”) when a fourth condition (for example, winning a jackpot) is established. The third signal may be a signal different from the second signal.

  The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a first control unit (for example, main control unit 300) and a second control unit (for example, first sub control unit 400, second control unit 400). Sub-control unit 500), detection means (for example, wide range magnetic sensor 700), door body (for example, front frame door 106, inner frame (main body 104), front frame door 106 and inner frame front frame door 106), A game stand including stage movable means (for example, stage movable bodies 924, 224, etc.), wherein the detection means is means capable of detecting magnetism, and the detection means is a signal relating to the detection of the magnetism. (Hereinafter, referred to as “magnetic detection signal”) can be output, and the first control unit is configured to output a second condition (for example, when it is determined that the door body is changed from an open state to a closed state). The detection means Means for outputting a first signal (for example, an initialization operation signal (magnetic operation stop signal)), the door body is a means provided with at least the effect moving means, and the first control means is , Means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of commands to the second control means, and one of the plurality of types of commands is a command including information relating to the detection of the magnetism (hereinafter referred to as “first command”). The first control means is means for transmitting the first command to the second control means when it is determined that the magnetism has been detected, and the second control means The control means is means for executing control to change the state of the effect moving means from the first state to the second state when the first command is received. is there.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the control means.

  In addition, stable control may be performed. In addition, when the magnetism is detected, the effect moving means is changed from the first state to the second state, so that the store clerk can easily notice the occurrence of an abnormality and warns a person who is cheating. There are cases where it is possible.

  The first control means may be a means for outputting a first signal to the detection means each time the second condition is satisfied.

  The first signal is a signal related to the initialization operation of the detection means (hereinafter referred to as “initialization operation signal”), and the first command is an error command. The detection means is means for starting the initialization operation on condition that the initialization operation signal is changed from an input state to a non-input state, and the detection means is different from the second condition. When the first condition (for example, power-on) is established, the initialization operation is started. The detection unit detects the magnetism after the initialization operation is executed. The detection means is configured to be configured such that a magnetic value (hereinafter referred to as “second value”) detected by the detection means is a value (hereinafter referred to as “first value”) set by the initialization operation. Higher than one value (for example, threshold) ”) If it may be a means for outputting the magnetic detection signal.

  According to such a configuration, the first control means outputs a signal for causing the detection means to execute the initialization operation when the first condition is satisfied, and when the second condition is satisfied, Since the signal for causing the detection means to execute the initialization operation is output again, it may be easy to prevent erroneous detection of magnetism and stable control may be performed.

  The detecting means executes the initialization operation on the condition that the initialization operation signal is changed from the input state to the non-input state based on the establishment of the first condition, and when the second condition is satisfied. Since the initialization operation is executed again, there are cases where it is easy to prevent erroneous detection of magnetism and stable control can be performed.

  In addition, it may be possible to prevent notification due to erroneous detection and to make it easier for the store clerk to grasp accurate information.

  Further, the requirement that the first condition is satisfied may be a requirement that includes turning on the power.

  Further, the requirement that the first condition is satisfied may be a requirement that the first control unit outputs the initialization operation signal.

  Further, the requirement that the first condition is satisfied may be a requirement that the power is turned on and the first control unit outputs the initialization operation signal.

  The first condition may be, for example, a condition for executing the initial initialization process of the detecting means or a condition until the first initialization process is stopped. The second condition may be a condition for executing the second and subsequent initialization processes of the detection means or a condition for restarting the initialization process after the first initialization process is stopped. .

  Further, at least one of the first condition and the second condition may be a condition including that the door body is in an open state (a door open signal is output), or the door body is in a closed state. It may be a condition including that the door opening signal is not output. That is, when the door is opened while the first signal is being output to the detection means, the output of the first signal is stopped, and the door is closed (determined) in the stopped state. The first signal may be output again.

  In addition, the effect moving means that has changed from the first state to the second state may continue the operation, or may stop the operation after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The initialization operation signal may be a magnetic operation stop signal, and the detection means may stop detecting the magnetism when the magnetic operation stop signal is input.

  The detecting means may be a means capable of outputting the magnetic detection signal to the first control means after the initialization operation is completed.

  According to such a configuration, notification by the effect moving means due to erroneous detection may be prevented, and the store clerk may be able to easily grasp accurate information.

  The detection means may be means for outputting the magnetic detection signal when the second value is the same value as the first value.

  Further, the effect moving means is means configured to include light emitting means (for example, LED), and the first state is a state including that the light emitting means is in the first light emitting state. The second state may be a state including that the light emitting means is in the second light emitting state.

  According to such a configuration, since the light emission state of the light emitting means changes when the magnetic detection is detected, it is easy for the store clerk to notice the occurrence of an abnormality, and a warning can be given to a person who is cheating. There is a case.

  The second control means is a means capable of executing control related to the operation of the effect movable means (hereinafter referred to as “effect movable control”), and the effect movable means executes the effect movable control. In this case, a part of the effect moving means is configured to be operable, and the second control means is configured such that the first control means is outputting the first signal to the detection means. In some cases, a means that may execute the effect movement control may be used.

  According to such a configuration, since the presentation movable control may be executed even when the first signal is being output, it is not determined whether or not the first signal has been output, thereby preventing fraud. There are cases where it is possible.

  Also, even if the initialization operation of the detection means is interrupted due to some abnormality and is resumed (retrying), the player can be notified of the initialization operation abnormality (retrying) by executing the effect movable body. Can be difficult to understand.

  In addition, there are cases where other preparations can be completed quickly while executing the initialization process of the detection means when the power is turned on.

  In addition, a second detection means (for example, a front frame door opening sensor 109) is provided, the detection means is a first detection means, and the second detection means is configured so that the door body is in a closed state. A means for outputting a door opening signal to the first control means when the door is in an open state, and one of the plurality of types of commands is a command including information on the open state of the door body. The first control means is means for transmitting the second command to the second control means when receiving the door opening signal. In addition, the second control unit may be a unit that may execute the effect movement control even when the second command is received.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the rendering operation can be enjoyed even when the door is opened by a store clerk by continuing the rendering operation even when the door is open.

  In addition, a second detection means (for example, a front frame door opening sensor 109) is provided, the detection means is a first detection means, and the second detection means is configured so that the door body is in a closed state. A means for outputting a door opening signal to the first control means when the door is in an open state, and one of the plurality of types of commands is a command including information on the open state of the door body. The first control means is means for transmitting the second command to the second control means when receiving the door opening signal. In addition, the second control unit that is executing the effect movement control may be a unit that stops the effect movement control when the second command is received.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where the store clerk can concentrate and eliminate the error by stopping the production operation while the door is open. Also, in the case of a configuration that outputs the first signal while the door is open, the staging operation is stopped while the door is open, so that the magnetic field can be stabilized and the detection operation can be stabilized. There is a case.

  Note that the second control means may interrupt the production movable control and resume from the continuation.

  The second control means may return to the origin position after interrupting the effect movement control.

  In addition, a second detection means (for example, a front frame door opening sensor 109) is provided, the detection means is a first detection means, and the second detection means is configured so that the door body is in a closed state. It is a means for outputting a door opening signal to the first control means when it is in an open state, and the first control means is configured such that when the door opening signal is changed from an input state to a non-input state, It is means for determining that the door body is in the closed state, and the requirement that the second condition is satisfied is determined by the first control means that the door body is changed from the open state to the closed state. It may be a requirement including that.

  Further, the detection means is means for starting output of the magnetic detection signal on condition that the magnetism has changed from a non-detection state to a detection state, and the detection means detects the magnetism from the detection state to the detection state. It may be a means for terminating the output of the magnetic detection signal on condition that the state has changed to the non-detection state.

  In addition, the first control means that outputs the first signal has a fourth condition (for example, it is determined that the door body is changed from a closed state to an open state, a solenoid is operated, etc. ) Is a means for stopping the output of the first signal, and the first control means for stopping the output of the first signal is that the second condition is satisfied. In this case, the first signal may be output again.

  The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In the above-described embodiment, the detection means (the wide-range magnetic sensor 700) is configured such that the magnetic value (second value) detected by the detection means is a value (first value (e.g. The magnetic detection signal is output when the threshold value is higher than the threshold value)), but the detection means (wide-range magnetic sensor 700) outputs the magnetic detection signal when the second value is equal to the first value. It may be.

  Moreover, about said embodiment, the following structures are applicable combining it suitably.

  <First condition and second condition>

  The requirement for the first condition to be satisfied may be a plurality of requirements. In this case, the first condition may be satisfied when all of the plurality of requirements are satisfied, or the first condition may be satisfied when one or more of the plurality of requirements are satisfied. The first condition may be satisfied when only the above requirement is satisfied. For example, when there are three requirements that satisfy the first condition, the first condition may be satisfied if two of the three requirements are satisfied.

  Further, the requirement for satisfying the second condition may be a plurality of requirements. In this case, the second condition may be satisfied when all of the plurality of requirements are satisfied, or the second condition may be satisfied when one or more of the plurality of requirements are satisfied. The second condition may be satisfied when only the above requirement is satisfied. For example, when there are three requirements that satisfy the second condition, the second condition may be satisfied if two of the three requirements are satisfied.

  An example of the requirement that the first condition is satisfied may be that the control means has been turned on, and that there has been a change in the state of the door body (for example, the open state has become a closed state). Or that the closed state has become an open state) may be determined by the control means (or the first control means), or the solenoid may be in an off state. In addition, since it is determined that it is abnormal that the magnetic operation stop confirmation signal (initialization FB signal) is turned on when the magnetic operation stop signal is off, the first condition is satisfied) The magnetic operation stop confirmation signal (initialization FB signal) may be off.

  An example of the requirement that the second condition is satisfied is that there is a change in the state of the door body (for example, that the open state is a closed state or the closed state is an open state). It may be determined by the means (or the first control means), the solenoid may be off, or the output of the magnetic operation stop signal may be stopped.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second condition (for example, the front frame door 106 is closed) is satisfied when the first condition is satisfied (for example, the front frame door 106 is opened). ) Later, the second condition may be satisfied, or the first condition (for example, the front frame door 106 is opened) is the second condition (for example, the front frame door 106). The first condition may be satisfied after (when is closed). That is, the establishment requirement of the second condition may be applied to the establishment requirement of the first condition, and the establishment requirement of the first condition may be the establishment requirement of the second condition.

  <Conditions for determining that there was magnetic detection>

Conditions for determining that there has been magnetic detection (detection) are as follows.
(1) When it is determined that the state of the magnetic detection signal has been changed (off has been turned on) in the monitoring by the control means (within the device monitoring process in step S1514 of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 44). In this case, the determination is mainly made by one main control unit timer interrupt process.
(2) It is determined that the state of the magnetic detection signal has been changed (in the device monitoring process in step S1514 of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 44), and the state of the magnetic detection signal has changed (off has been turned on). Continues for a certain period (for example, 100 ms (25 interrupts)). In this case, the determination is mainly made by a multiple control main control unit timer interrupt process.
(3) The magnetic detection signal is input a plurality of times (the state of the magnetic detection signal changes to off, on, off, on, off...).
(4) Either of the above conditions (1), (2), or (3) and the initialization have been completed (that is, the magnetic operation stop signal is not being output). This means that the output of the magnetic operation stop signal from the main control unit 300 has been successfully completed. Alternatively, when the “initialization complete signal” of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is output from the wide-range magnetic sensor 700, the condition (4) is that the input of the “initialization-completed signal” is input to the main control unit 300. Means that.
(5) The condition of (1) or (2) or (3) and / or (4) above and (4) the control means does not (cannot) detect magnetic detection based on “other information” from the wide range magnetic sensor. Be in a state.

  Here, as an example of “another information”, the operation of a solenoid of “a specific solenoid (for example, a solenoid whose operation is controlled by a main control unit (such as an electric chew, an attacker, a solenoid for a specific area in the attacker)) There is something that is not inside. " The specific solenoid does not include a solenoid (for example, a solenoid of the effect movable body 224) controlled by other control means (sub-control unit, payout control unit), but includes only a solenoid controlled by the main control unit. May be. Further, only the solenoid controlled by other than the main control unit 300 is included, and the solenoid controlled by the main control unit may not be included.

  An example of “other information” may be “no high-priority error has occurred”. In this embodiment, the magnetic detection error is the highest-priority error. For example, when another error (magnetic field detection error, vibration error, etc.) is the highest-priority error, “a high-priority error occurs. It is better to make it a condition. In particular, when an error that stops the gaming operation has occurred, it is determined that there is an input from the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 when performing the determination process in step S1505 of the main control unit timer interrupt process (FIG. 44). Since there is a possibility that it cannot be performed, it is preferable that the condition is “no high-priority error has occurred”.

  An example of “other information” is “the door is not open”. Even if it is a condition that is different from the condition that “the magnetic operation stop signal is output while the door is open”, and “the magnetic element is not detected when the door is opened in a state where magnetic detection is possible”. Good.

  <Process after magnetic detection error determination>

  When the magnetic detection error is an error for stopping the game operation, the detection state of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 becomes “detection → non-detection” after being determined as the magnetic detection error, and again becomes “non-detection → detection”, so Even if a magnetic detection signal is output from the sensor 700, the control means does not determine the magnetic detection error, but may determine the magnetic detection error. Even if the condition for outputting the operation stop signal after the determination of the magnetic detection error is satisfied, the operation stop signal may not be output (not initialized), but the operation stop signal may be output.

Further, when the magnetic detection error is an error that does not stop the gaming operation, the detection state of the wide-range magnetic sensor 700 becomes “detection → non-detection” after being determined as the magnetic detection error, and becomes “non-detection → detection” again. There may be a case where a magnetic detection signal is output from the wide range magnetic sensor 700 and it is determined again as a magnetic detection error. Even if the condition for outputting the operation stop signal after the determination of the magnetic detection error is satisfied, the operation stop signal may not be output (not initialized), but the operation stop signal may be output. You may go.
<External output signal>

  An external output signal (security information signal) may be output for a certain period from the occurrence of an error. The external output signal (security information signal) may be continuously output until the error is resolved. Also, if there is a power outage during the output of an external output signal (security information signal) (for example, when 20 seconds have elapsed from the signal output), the output of the external output signal (security information signal) is stopped and after power is restored However, the output of the external output signal (security information signal) may be interrupted, and the external output signal (security information signal) that was output will continue after power recovery. You may output from (remaining 10 seconds).

  In addition, other external output signals (signals other than the security information signals of the external terminal board signals 1 to 9, 11 and 12 shown in FIG. 46) are output even when the security information signal is output. Alternatively, the output may be stopped.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an output example when an error B further occurs during the output of the security information signal according to the occurrence of the error A, and a security information signal according to the occurrence of the error B is output. FIG. 5A shows a state in which a security information signal is output for T seconds in response to the occurrence of error A.

  FIG. 5B shows an example in which when a further error B occurs during the output of the security information signal in response to the occurrence of the error A, a signal is further output for T seconds after the start of the output of the security information signal due to the occurrence of the error B It is.

  FIG. 4C shows that when an error B further occurs during the output of the security information signal corresponding to the occurrence of the error A, the security information signal of the error A is output for T seconds, and the security information of the error B is continued. This is an example of outputting a signal for T seconds.

  FIG. 4D shows an example in which the error B security information signal is not output when the error B further occurs during the output of the security information signal corresponding to the occurrence of the error A.

  In the output examples of these signals, the output time of the security information signal corresponding to the error (error B) that occurs later may be shorter or longer than T seconds. Also, a security information signal corresponding to an error that occurred later may be output after a certain time (for example, 4 ms (after 1 interrupt)) has elapsed since the occurrence of an error (error B) that occurred later. . In the same figure, the order of errors that occur may be changed.

  <Direction moving means>

A plurality of effect moving means may be provided on the frame (front frame door 106). In that case, the effect moving means provided in the frame (front frame door 106) is such that both the effect moving means A and the effect moving means B return to the origin position when the door body (front frame door 106) is opened. Alternatively, one of the effect moving means A and the effect moving means B may return to the origin position. Further, both the effect moving means A and the effect moving means B may be prevented from returning to the origin position. Further, the effect movable means A and B may be configured so that the state changes according to one effect data. For example, the effect movable means A and B are both operated by the effect (operation) data X (or It may be configured to emit light, operate and emit light, or the like. Further, the effect movable means A and B may be configured such that the state changes according to different effect data. For example, the structure in which the effect movable means A operates with the effect (operation) data X (or emits light, or It may be a configuration in which the effect moving means B operates with the operation data Y (or a configuration in which the operation movable unit B emits light or operates and emits light). Further, when the door body (front frame door 106) is opened, there may be an effect moving means that returns to the initial position and an effect moving means that does not return (stops or continues the operation). In this example, two effect moving means (A, B) are exemplified, but the present invention can be similarly applied to three or more effect moving means (A, B, C...).
Further, a plurality of effect moving means may be provided on the game board 200. In that case, the effect movable means provided in the game board 200 may be configured such that both the effect movable means A and the effect movable means B return to the origin position when the door body (front frame door 106) is opened. Alternatively, one of the effect moving means A and the effect moving means B may return to the origin position. Further, both the effect moving means A and the effect moving means B may be prevented from returning to the origin position. Further, the effect movable means A and B may be configured so that the state changes according to one effect data. For example, the effect movable means A and B are both operated by the effect (operation) data X (or It may be configured to emit light, operate and emit light, or the like. Further, the effect movable means A and B may be configured such that the state changes according to different effect data. For example, the structure in which the effect movable means A operates with the effect (operation) data X (or emits light, or It may be a configuration in which the effect moving means B operates with the operation data Y (or a configuration in which the operation movable unit B emits light or operates and emits light). Further, when the door body (front frame door 106) is opened, there may be an effect moving means that returns to the initial position and an effect moving means that does not return (stops or continues the operation). In this example, two effect moving means (A, B) are exemplified, but the present invention can be similarly applied to three or more effect moving means (A, B, C...). The effect moving means provided in the game board 200 may continue the operation without returning to the origin position (initial position) even when the door body is in an open state, but the door body is similar to the door body. The operation may be stopped when the door is opened.

  In addition, when the production movable means is not correctly connected to the game stand (for example, the connector is disconnected) or when an abnormality occurs in the drive means (motor or the like) provided in the production movable means, the first sub-control means ( The first sub-control unit 400) may perform control to execute error notification (emission, error display by display means, output of error notification sound by speaker, etc.). The error related to the above is an error that does not change the gaming state (an error that does not involve the main control unit 300). In addition, the error may be an error that can be resolved by turning the power off and turning it on again after turning the power off and in a normal state (for example, reconnecting the connector) (in this case, an abnormal state) If the error occurs again, the error may be resolved when it is determined that the error has occurred (connector connection or the like). Further, the notification of the error may be continuously performed until the error is resolved, or may be terminated after the notification is made for a certain period after the error is determined, or both of them may be performed. .

  The solenoid cancel function of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 may not be used.

  Note that the stationary magnetic field measurement time (period T) is the initialization operation when the power is turned on, and the second initialization operation (or the second and subsequent operations) in response to the fall due to the non-output state from the output state of the magnetic operation stop signal. However, the stationary magnetic field measurement time of the initialization operation when the power is turned on may be longer or shorter than the stationary magnetic field measurement time of the second (or subsequent) initialization operation.

  The initialization operation of the wide range magnetic sensor 700 of this example is performed when the door body (front door (front frame door 106), inner frame (main body 104), front door and inner frame) is in a closed state. Is preferred. The wide-range magnetic sensor 700 is affected by a magnetic field around a game table (pachinko machine, slot machine) due to a current flowing through a metal circuit such as a sheet metal constituting the door body or a circuit of a substrate provided on the door body. The influence which depends on depends on the state of the door (open or closed). For this reason, in order to measure an accurate magnetic field, it is desirable to measure the magnetic field with the door closed. Therefore, for example, when the door is entirely made of plastic, an accurate magnetic field can be measured even if the initialization operation is executed regardless of the state of the door.

  The first control means may be main control means.

  The first control means may indicate a substrate (main control unit 300) provided with a CPU (or a basic circuit including a CPU or the like), but the same substrate case (substrate case 158). A plurality of substrates (main control unit 300 and first relay substrate 702) housed in the storage device. Further, it may indicate a CPU provided on the substrate.

  The second control means may be a means provided on a different substrate from the first control means.

  The second control means may be a sub control means.

  The second control means includes a plurality of substrates (a sub-control substrate (a substrate provided with a basic circuit including a CPU or a CPU), a liquid crystal control substrate (a substrate provided with a VRAM, VDP, and a liquid crystal ROM). , A motor control board). The liquid crystal control board may be composed of a board provided with VRAM and VDP and a board provided with a liquid crystal ROM.

  The stationary magnetic field measurement period (period T) may be the same as the basic random number update period, or may be longer than the basic random number update period. Further, it may be shorter than the basic random number update period.

  The stationary magnetic field measurement period (period T) may be longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt process.

  The stationary magnetic field measurement period (period T) may be shorter than the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the attacker at the big hit, and shorter than the maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the attacker at the small hit. Also good. Moreover, it may be shorter than the minimum opening time of an attacker, may be long, and may be the same.

  The stationary magnetic field measurement period (period T) includes other external output signals (for example, main prize ball information signal, out ball information signal, symbol determination number information signal, start port information signal, jackpot 1 to 3 information signal, door Open information signal, other information signal, security information signal, start port information signal) may be shorter than the output time, but may be longer than other external output signals (for example, award ball information signal). There may be.

  If a magnetic operation stop signal is input during the output of the magnetic detection signal by the wide-range magnetic sensor 700, the detection means interrupts the output of the magnetic detection signal and does not perform the magnetic detection operation, but the magnetic detection signal is not The magnetic detection signal may be continuously output until the output state is reached. At this time, the magnetic operation stop signal output from the control means may be discarded on the wide-area magnetic sensor 700 side. However, based on the input without discarding, the magnetic detection detection signal is adjacent to the non-output state. After that, the initialization operation may be executed.

  The maximum execution time of the initialization operation when the power is turned on by the wide range magnetic sensor is longer than the maximum execution time of the initialization operation executed after the magnetic operation stop signal is input from the control means to the wide range magnetic sensor 700. May be the same or shorter.

  In this example, the initialization operation at the time of power-on is performed by a stationary magnetic field measurement and processing different from the stationary magnetic field measurement (for example, failure determination, sensitivity offset initialization, etc.). The initialization operation that is performed after the magnetic operation stop signal is input is only stationary magnetic field measurement, but the initialization operation that is performed after the magnetic operation stop signal is input from the control means is also stationary magnetic field measurement. Other processing may be executed. Here, the processing other than the steady magnetic field measurement may be executed by another processing executed when the power is turned on (that is, the same series of processing as the initialization operation when the power is turned on). A process including a part or all of the process may be executed, or a process different from the other process may be executed.

  The magnetic operation stop signal may be referred to as a (magnetic) detection operation stop signal.

  The magnetic operation stop confirmation signal may be referred to as a (magnetic) detection operation stop confirmation signal.

  For example, the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and Provided on the reels, a stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is won by lottery, and a reel based on a lottery result of the lottery means The symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control relating to the stop of the rotation of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the internal winning combination. And a payout control for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode. Stage and also suitable for such as a slot machine with.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. That is, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by credit.

  In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to game machines represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 120 Speaker 156 Main control board 160 1st sub control board 170 Discharge control board 182 Power supply board 208 Decorative design display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 230 1st Special drawing start port 232 Second special drawing start port 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
600 payout control unit 708 RAM

Claims (13)

Control means;
Detection means;
A game machine equipped with
The detection means is means capable of detecting magnetism,
The detection means is a means capable of outputting a signal relating to the detection of the magnetism (hereinafter referred to as “magnetic detection signal”),
The control means is means for outputting a first signal when the second condition is satisfied,
The control means is a means for executing control related to a signal output to the outside (hereinafter referred to as “second signal”) when it is determined that the magnetism is detected.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The first signal is a signal related to an initialization operation of the detection means (hereinafter referred to as “initialization operation signal”).
The second signal is a security signal,
The detection means is means for starting the initialization operation on condition that the initialization operation signal is changed from an input state to a non-input state.
The detection means is means for starting the initialization operation when a first condition different from the second condition is satisfied,
The detection means is means configured to detect the magnetism after the initialization operation is executed,
The detection means has a magnetic value (hereinafter referred to as a “second value”) detected by the detection means more than a value (hereinafter referred to as a “first value”) set by the initialization operation. A means for outputting the magnetic detection signal when it is high;
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes turning on the power.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement including that the control means outputs the initialization operation signal.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 2 to 4,
The initialization operation signal is a magnetic operation stop signal,
The detection means is means for stopping the detection of the magnetism when the magnetic operation stop signal is input.
A game stand characterized by that. A game table according to any one of claims 2 to 5,
The detection means is means capable of outputting the magnetic detection signal to the control means after the initialization operation is completed.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 2 to 6,
The detection means is means for outputting the magnetic detection signal when the second value is the same value as the first value.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
A door,
A second detection means;
With
The detection means is a first detection means,
The second detection means is means for outputting a door opening signal to the control means when the door body is in an open state from a closed state,
The control means is means for determining that the door body is in the closed state when the door opening signal is changed from an input state to a non-input state;
The requirement that the second condition is satisfied is a requirement including that the control means determines that the door body has changed from the open state to the closed state.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8,
The control means is means for executing control to output the second signal when power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The detection means is means for starting output of the magnetic detection signal on condition that the magnetism has changed from a non-detection state to a detection state.
The detection means is means for terminating the output of the magnetic detection signal on condition that the magnetism has changed from the detection state to the non-detection state.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10, Comprising:
The control means that is outputting the first signal is means for stopping the output of the first signal when the third condition is satisfied,
The control unit that stopped outputting the first signal is a unit that outputs the first signal again when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
The control means is means for executing control for outputting a signal to be output to the outside (hereinafter referred to as “third signal”) when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The third signal is a signal different from the second signal.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.